CONTROLS for Your BMW Z4 2 Door First Generation (2002-2008)

CONTROLS  
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36  
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................. 41  
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 44  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ........................................................... 56  
General settings ......................................................................................... 59  
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 72  
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ....................................................... 100  
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 109  
Driving ....................................................................................................... 113  
Displays ..................................................................................................... 130  
Lights ......................................................................................................... 146  
Safety ........................................................................................................ 152  
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 172  
Driver assistance systems ..................................................................... 176  
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 205  
Climate control ......................................................................................... 206  
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 220  
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 227  
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 231  
35  
 
Cockpit  
CONTROLS  
Cockpit  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Power windowsꢀꢁ93  
Unlockingꢀꢁ78  
Lockingꢀꢁ78  
2
3
Exterior mirror operationꢀꢁ104  
Unlocking the trunk lidꢀꢁ84  
5
6
Seating comfort features  
Memory functionꢀꢁ107  
4
Central locking system  
Lights  
36  
 
Cockpit  
CONTROLS  
Light switchꢀꢁ146  
Depending on the equipment:  
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ180  
Lights off  
Cruise control: to store the speed  
Daytime running lightsꢀꢁ148  
Parking lightsꢀꢁ147  
Pausing cruise control  
Automatic headlight controlꢀꢁ146  
Adaptive light functionsꢀꢁ148  
High-beam Assistantꢀꢁ149  
Low beamsꢀꢁ147  
Continuing cruise control  
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐  
tance  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐  
tance  
Instrument lightingꢀꢁ150  
Cruise control rocker switch  
Right roadside parking lightꢀꢁ147  
Left roadside parking lightꢀꢁ147  
10 Instrument clusterꢀꢁ130  
11 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Selection listsꢀꢁ140  
7
Steering column stalk, left  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communicationꢀꢁ8  
Turn signalꢀꢁ119  
Voice activation systemꢀꢁ52  
High beams, head‐  
light flasherꢀꢁ120  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communicationꢀꢁ8  
High-beam Assistantꢀꢁ149  
Thumbwheel for selection listsꢀꢁ140  
Widgets in the instrument clus‐  
terꢀꢁ131  
12 Steering column stalk, right  
Trip dataꢀꢁ141  
Wipersꢀꢁ120  
8
9
Shift paddleꢀꢁ125  
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Manual Speed Limiterꢀꢁ176  
Rain sensorꢀꢁ121  
Cleaning the windshield and head‐  
lightsꢀꢁ121  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise control on/offꢀꢁ178  
13  
Horn, entire surface  
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ180  
37  
 
Cockpit  
CONTROLS  
14  
Heated steering wheelꢀꢁ106  
16 Glove compartmentꢀꢁ227  
17 Unlocking the hoodꢀꢁ281  
15 Adjusting the steering wheelꢀꢁ106  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
2
Control Displayꢀꢁ47  
Hazard warning systemꢀꢁ295  
8
9
Opening and closing the  
convertible topꢀꢁ94  
Parking brakeꢀꢁ116  
Automatic Holdꢀꢁ117  
Intelligent Safetyꢀꢁ155  
3
4
5
6
Ventilationꢀꢁ215  
Glove compartmentꢀꢁ228  
10  
Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ127  
SPORT driving mode  
Automatic climate controlꢀꢁ210  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐  
tionꢀꢁ8  
COMFORT driving mode  
7
Controller with buttonsꢀꢁ47  
38  
 
Cockpit  
CONTROLS  
ECO PRO driving mode  
ADAPTIVE driving mode  
13 Steptronic transmission selector leverꢀꢁ123  
11  
12  
Switching drive-ready state on/  
offꢀꢁ113  
Auto Start/Stop functionꢀꢁ113  
PDC Park Distance Controlꢀꢁ189  
Rearview cameraꢀꢁ193  
Cross traffic warningꢀꢁ202  
Parking assistantꢀꢁ196  
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐  
trolꢀꢁ172  
39  
 
Cockpit  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the roofliner  
1
2
Emergency Request, SOSꢀꢁ297  
3
4
Reading lightsꢀꢁ151  
Interior lightsꢀꢁ150  
Indicator light, front-seat passenger  
airbagꢀꢁ155  
40  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
General information  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one  
of the three states:  
▷ Idle state.  
Warning  
▷ Standby state.  
▷ Drive-ready state.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Idle state  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
Concept  
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All  
power consumers are deactivated.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from  
the outside and after exiting and locking.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Automatic idle state  
The idle state is automatically established under  
the following conditions:  
41  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
Standby state  
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Concept  
When standby state is switched on, most func‐  
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.  
Desired settings can be adjusted.  
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of  
the front doors is opened when exiting the  
vehicle.  
The idle state is not automatically established  
while a phone call is active.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front  
doors are opened from the outside.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
Via iDrive:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
OFF is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster. The drivetrain is  
switched off and standby state  
switched on.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Manual idle state  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of  
trip:  
Drive-ready state  
Concept  
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
General information  
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability  
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state  
switched on.  
Safety information  
Press and hold the button until  
the OFF indicator on the instru‐  
ment cluster goes out.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐  
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into  
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐  
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐  
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐  
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to  
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐  
ficient ventilation.  
42  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Gasoline engine  
Warning  
Depending on the motorization, the full drive  
power may not be available for approximately  
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,  
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐  
ometer shows the current engine speed.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
Switching off drive-ready state  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐  
hicle stopped.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
NOTICE  
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐  
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is  
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐  
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of  
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in  
quick succession.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Switching on drive-ready state  
Concept  
Drive-ready state is switched on  
via the Start/Stop button:  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief  
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.  
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐  
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.  
43  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
iDrive  
Input and display  
Main menu  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into two areas. The  
left area contains menu items that can be used  
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area  
contains widgets that provide quick access to  
certain functions.  
Operating concept  
Concept  
iDrive includes a large number of functions.  
These functions can be operated via Controller  
and, depending on the equipment version, via  
touch screen or voice activation system.  
Media/Radio  
All functions of the entertainment system,  
e.g., radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐  
ternal devices and music collection.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Communication  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control  
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐  
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the  
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Phone and message functions, e-mail and  
calendar, and also the connection and manage‐  
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.  
Navigation  
Access to the navigation system, destination  
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map  
views and other functions, such as Points of In‐  
terest and areas to be avoided.  
My Car  
Information about vehicle status and trips.  
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and  
also administration of driver profiles and range of  
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.  
44  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Apps  
Management and access to apps and vehicle  
Activating/deactivating the  
functions  
functions. Additional apps can be purchased  
from the BMW Store.  
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐  
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐  
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the  
menu item activates or deactivates the function.  
Widgets  
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐  
quently used functions. The configured widgets  
display dynamic contents such as the navigation  
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Status information  
Letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be selected when the  
destination is entered, for example.  
General information  
The status field can be found in the upper area of  
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐  
played in the form of symbols.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
Controller, touchscreen or the voice activation  
system. The keyboard's display changes auto‐  
matically.  
Radio symbols  
Symbol Meaning  
Symbol  
Function  
HD Radio station is being received.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
or  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Enter a blank space.  
Use voice activation.  
Confirm entry.  
Telephone symbols  
Symbol Meaning  
Incoming or outgoing call.  
Missed call.  
Slide the input area to the left or  
right.  
Signal strength of cellular network.  
Network search.  
Entry comparison  
When entering names and addresses, the choice  
is narrowed down with every letter and number  
and added automatically as needed.  
Cellular network is not available.  
The critical charge state of the mo‐  
bile phone has been reached.  
Entries are continuously compared with data  
stored in the vehicle.  
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered  
during entry for which data is available.  
Roaming is active.  
Locating is active.  
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐  
tered in all languages that are available in  
iDrive.  
SMS text message received.  
Message received.  
45  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or  
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.  
Symbol Meaning  
Reminder.  
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently  
used.  
Sending not possible.  
Overview  
Entertainment symbols  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Music hard disk.  
Bluetooth audio.  
USB audio interface.  
WiFi.  
1
Programmable memory buttons  
Other symbols  
Symbol Meaning  
Check Control message.  
Storing a function  
A function can be stored on a programmable  
memory button. A button with a stored function  
can be overwritten with another function.  
The sound output has been  
switched off.  
1. Select function via iDrive.  
Request for the current vehicle posi‐  
tion.  
2.  
Press and hold the desired button  
until the displayed bar on the Control Display  
has loaded completely.  
Checking the current vehicle posi‐  
tion.  
Driver profile.  
Messages.  
Executing a function  
Press the button.  
Service requirements.  
Information.  
Stop.  
The function will work immediately. This means,  
for instance that the number is dialed when a  
phone number is selected.  
New data protection-related service  
available.  
Displaying the key assignment  
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or  
use objects.  
Programmable memory buttons  
General information  
The button assignment is displayed at the top  
edge of screen.  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐  
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐  
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐  
46  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting all button assignments  
Safety information  
All button assignments can be deleted.  
NOTICE  
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same  
time.  
Objects in the area in the front of the Control  
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐  
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not place objects in the area in front of the  
Control Display.  
2. "OK"  
Control Display and  
Controller  
Switching on/off automatically  
Concept  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control  
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐  
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen.  
The Control Display is switched on automatically  
after unlocking.  
In certain situations, the Control Display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐  
eration is performed on the vehicle for several  
minutes.  
Overview  
Switching on/off manually  
The Control Display can also be switched off  
manually.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Screen off"  
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐  
troller to switch it back on again.  
1
2
Control Display with touchscreen  
System limits  
Controller with buttons and touchpad  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar  
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down  
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature  
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐  
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.  
Control Display  
General information  
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐  
structions, refer to page 306.  
Controller  
General information  
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐  
rectly. The Controller can be used to select  
menu items and enter the settings.  
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the  
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 50.  
47  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐  
ample.  
Button Function  
Opens the Communication menu.  
Opens the Media/Radio menu.  
Opens destination input menu for  
navigation.  
Opens navigation map.  
Opens the previous display.  
Opens the Options menu.  
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.  
Operating via the Controller  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐  
plays, for example.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Selecting a menu  
Selecting menu items  
Buttons on the Controller  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
Button Function  
2. Press the Controller.  
Opens the main menu.  
Select a widget  
Opens the Apps menu.  
1. Move the Controller to the right.  
2. Select a widget.  
3. Press the Controller.  
48  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐  
ment cluster, refer to page 131.  
▷ Move the Controller to the left.  
The current display closes and the previous  
display is shown.  
Adjusting the menu  
▷
Press the button.  
Adjusting widgets  
The previous display re-opens.  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.  
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐  
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments  
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
▷ Move the Controller to the right.  
The new display opens.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be  
opened.  
Via iDrive:  
Opening the Options menu  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐  
justed.  
Press the button.  
The "Options" menu is displayed.  
The menu consists of various areas:  
2. Tip the Controller up.  
3. "Adjust main menu"  
▷ Help for the selected menu, for instance  
"Help".  
4. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷ Add new widget: "Add widget".  
▷ System settings, for instance "Control display  
off".  
A maximum of four widgets can be dis‐  
played per page.  
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,  
for instance for "Media/Radio".  
▷ Add new page: "Add page".  
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".  
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select  
widget.  
Changing settings  
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.  
Via iDrive:  
5. "Done"  
1. "CAR"  
Adjusting menu contents  
2. "Settings"  
The display of the menus of "MEDIA", "COM"  
and "NAV" can be adjusted, for instance to re‐  
move the entries of functions that are not used  
from the menu.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
Via iDrive:  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is  
displayed.  
1. Select the menu.  
2. "Personalize menu"  
7. Press the Controller.  
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis‐  
played.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
Changing between displays  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.  
After a menu item is selected, for instance  
"Settings", a new display appears.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
49  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting  
Symbol Function  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷ The system distinguishes between upper  
and lower-case letters and numbers. The en‐  
try may require switching between letters and  
numbers, refer to page 44.  
Press the Controller: delete letters or  
number.  
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the  
Control Display.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all  
letters or numbers.  
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,  
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐  
played in a text box.  
▷ The set language determines what input is  
possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Entering special characters  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐  
played in the list.  
Input  
Operation  
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Operation via touchpad  
General information  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the  
touchpad on the Controller.  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐  
per area of the touchpad.  
Selecting functions  
Via iDrive:  
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touchpad.  
1. "CAR"  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be moved  
via the touchpad.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Function  
Operation  
5. Select the desired setting:  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di‐  
rection.  
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐  
bers.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out on the touch‐  
pad with fingers.  
▷ "Map": use the map.  
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐  
lecting the list field.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered  
letters and numbers.  
50  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".  
Operation via touchscreen  
General information  
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of  
widget.  
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐  
screen.  
4. Tap "Done".  
Showing/hiding the display bar  
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch  
the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐  
jects.  
At the top edge of the screen, it is possible to  
show or hide a display bar with additional func‐  
tions.  
Opening the main menu  
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐  
play bar at the top edge of the screen.  
Tap on the symbol.  
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar  
at the top edge of the screen.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, a new display  
opens.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be  
opened.  
▷ Swipe to the left.  
▷ Tap arrow.  
The main menu is displayed.  
The new display opens.  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.  
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐  
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments  
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Changing settings  
Settings such as brightness can be changed via  
the touchscreen.  
Via iDrive:  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐  
justed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. To perform the desired setting:  
2.  
Tap the symbol in the main menu.  
3. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷ Add new widget:  
lect desired widget.  
Tap symbol and se‐  
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or  
left, until the desired setting is displayed.  
The requested widget will be inserted in  
the relevant position. A maximum of four  
widgets can be displayed per page.  
▷
,
Tap on the symbol.  
▷ Delete selected widget:  
Tap symbol.  
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".  
51  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐  
tent.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
▷ The system includes special microphones on  
the driver side and the front passenger side.  
1.  
Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.  
▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice  
activation system.  
A keyboard appears in the Control Display.  
2. Enter letters and numbers.  
Functional requirements  
Deleting  
▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐  
ported by the voice activation system. To set  
the language, refer to page 61.  
Symbol Function  
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐  
ter or number.  
▷ Always say commands in the language of the  
voice activation system.  
Tapping and holding the symbol all  
letters: deletes all letters or numbers.  
Activating the voice activation  
system  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved using the  
touchscreen.  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice activation feature:  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di‐  
rection.  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal  
wake word.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin‐  
gers.  
▷ Active voice processing.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Then say the command. No other commands  
may be available. In this case, operate the func‐  
tion via iDrive.  
Voice activation system  
The voice activation can be terminated:  
Press the button on the steering wheel  
again or press ›Cancel‹.  
Concept  
The voice activation system can be used to op‐  
erate functions with spoken commands. The  
system supports you with announcements dur‐  
ing input.  
Button on the steering wheel  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
The voice control system and the feedback it  
provides are not a substitute for the printed or  
Integrated Owner's Manual.  
wheel.  
2. Wait for the signal.  
3. Say the command.  
General information  
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐  
hicle is stationary can only be operated via  
52  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐  
cates that the voice activation system is  
active.  
Active voice processing  
General information  
Active voice processing recognizes keywords  
that are spoken in the car's interior. For instance,  
if the name of a city is named, information for the  
navigation will be displayed on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Wake word  
General information  
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ will start  
the system. Immediately following, the voice acti‐  
vation can be continued with voice commands.  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹.  
2. Say the command.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Preset wake word  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐  
vated and deactivated. The ›Hello BMW‹ option  
activates the preset and personal wake word.  
5. "Active speech processing"  
Via iDrive:  
Possible commands  
General information  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Most contents on the Control Display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐  
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as  
they are shown in the list.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW""  
Say the commands, numbers, and letters  
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Personal wake word  
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a  
personal wake word can be set up.  
The status of the voice recognition is displayed  
in the upper area of the Control Display.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Example for function  
The commands of the menu items are spoken  
just as they are selected via the Controller.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "Personal keyword"  
6. "Start recording"  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
2. ›Media and radio‹  
3. ›Presets‹  
For the "Start recording" option, online  
speech processing must be available and ac‐  
tivated. Alternatively, the personal wake word  
can be entered using the Controller.  
The stored stations are displayed on the Control  
Display.  
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
53  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The voice activation system can also be used to  
operate most climate control functions, refer to  
page 219.  
▷ "Online speech processing".  
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under  
"Personalization" in the data protection  
menu.  
The voice activation system can be used to enter  
the destination, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐  
gation, Entertainment, Communication.  
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" in  
the data protection menu.  
Help on the voice activation system  
▷ To have the available spoken instructions  
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.  
Example for function  
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal  
wake word.  
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐  
ple of the voice activation system read out  
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.  
2. ›How high is the outside temperature‹  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant provides  
information about the external temperature.  
▷ To have help for the current menu read out  
loud: ›Help‹.  
Adjusting  
Information for Emergency  
Requests  
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate  
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,  
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can  
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a  
phone connection.  
Setting the language  
The language to be used for voice activation and  
system announcements can be set.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 297,  
close to the interior mirror.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "System language"  
6. Select the desired language.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Setting the voice dialog  
Concept  
You can set the system to use standard dialog or  
a short version.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant expands the  
voice activation function to include additional  
functions that improve interaction in the vehicle.  
It is possible to ask questions about the current  
state of the vehicle, for instance.  
The short version of the voice dialog plays back  
short messages in abbreviated form.  
Via iDrive:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is connected  
to other digital services such as the Concierge  
service and is continually being developed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
Functional requirement  
The driver's profile is activated.  
5. "Speech mode"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Activate the following settings to access the full  
range of functions:  
54  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear  
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid  
making other noise in the vehicle while  
speaking.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
voice activation system. The function can be de‐  
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐  
rupted, for instance due to background noise or  
talking.  
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems  
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud  
and clear.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Using the voice activation  
system of the smartphone  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be  
used via voice activation.  
Activate voice command response on the smart‐  
phone for this purpose.  
5. "Speaking during voice output"  
Online speech processing  
1.  
2.  
Press and hold the button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
Online speech processing provides a dictation  
function, a natural method of entering destina‐  
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐  
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to  
a service provider via an encrypted connection  
and stored locally there.  
Voice command response is activated on the  
smartphone.  
Release the button.  
Via iDrive:  
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐  
pears on the Control Display.  
1. "CAR"  
If it was not possible to activate voice command  
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears  
on the Control Display.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "Online speech processing"  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐  
structions until the desired volume is set.  
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
System limits  
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead  
to problems. Keep the doors and windows  
closed.  
55  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the printed  
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
After a software update in the  
vehicle  
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐  
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest  
information.  
Functional requirement  
The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐  
quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
Information about the version  
General information  
The information about the version contains a de‐  
scription of the updates that are included in the  
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been completed  
successfully, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐  
formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐  
tomer portal at any time.  
Concept  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐  
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐  
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional  
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐  
ble.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐  
ble.  
The upgrade will not be installed until it was con‐  
firmed on the vehicle.  
Displaying information about the  
version  
Via iDrive:  
▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes.  
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.  
1. "CAR"  
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐  
lation.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Installed version:"  
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐  
tion.  
56  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
Safety information  
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Via BMW Connected app  
1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐  
phone in the BMW Connected app.  
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐  
nected app.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
3. Establish a WiFi and Bluetooth connection  
between the smartphone and the vehicle.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
The data transfer of the upgrade from the  
smartphone to the vehicle occurs while driv‐  
ing.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Install the upgrade  
General information  
After successful download completion, installa‐  
tion is offered once the vehicle is parked.  
Search for and download of an  
upgrade  
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.  
General information  
After the successful completion of the upgrade,  
booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐  
vated automatically while driving.  
There are various options to search for and  
download an upgrade:  
▷ Automatic.  
▷ Via iDrive.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Via BMW Connected app.  
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.  
▷ The external temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
Automatic  
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade  
is automatically loaded into the vehicle.  
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.  
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.  
▷ Transmission position P is engaged.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
Preparing the vehicle  
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
▷ Ensure cellular network reception so that an  
error message can be sent, for example if the  
installation is terminated.  
57  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷ Close the convertible top.  
▷ Close the windows.  
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a  
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as  
a mobile phone.  
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle at the  
start of the installation.  
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.  
Additional vehicle related functional require‐  
ments are shown on the Control Display.  
Install the upgrade later  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
▷ Hazard warning system.  
▷ Central locking system.  
▷ Parking lights.  
▷ Horn.  
▷ Alarm system.  
▷ Emergency Request.  
▷ Power windows.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐  
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐  
nected app.  
58  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
General settings  
Retrieving messages  
Via iDrive:  
Vehicle features and  
options  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
3. Select the desired message.  
Deleting messages  
All messages, except Check Control messages  
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can  
be deleted from the list.  
Check Control messages or messages from the  
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as  
they are relevant.  
Messages  
Via iDrive:  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
Concept  
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐  
ing in the vehicle in list form.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS.  
4.  
Press the button.  
General information  
The following messages can be displayed:  
▷ Traffic messages.  
5. "Delete"  
Adjusting  
The following settings can be adjusted:  
▷ Check Control messages.  
▷ Service requirements messages.  
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐  
sages will be permitted.  
▷ Communication messages, for example e-  
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.  
▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐  
ceived messages.  
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service  
or the BMW Connected app.  
Via iDrive:  
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
The number of messages is additionally dis‐  
played in the status field.  
The Messages menu can also be created as  
Widget, refer to page 48.  
3. "Settings"  
4. Move the Controller to the right.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
59  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Automatic time setting  
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,  
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are  
updated automatically.  
Time  
Setting the time zone  
Via iDrive:  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time zone:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Automatic time setting"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Setting the time  
Via iDrive:  
Date  
Setting the date  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date:"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are  
displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is  
displayed.  
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes  
are displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
8. Make the settings for the month and year.  
9. "OK"  
9. "OK"  
Setting the time format  
Via iDrive:  
Setting the date format  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Settings"  
1. "CAR"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time format:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date format:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
60  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Trip data settings  
Concept  
The intervals in which the trip data, refer to  
page 141, will be reset can be configured.  
Language  
Setting the language  
Via iDrive:  
Resetting trip data  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset trip data"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
5. "System language"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Speed warning  
Setting the voice dialog  
For voice dialog for the voice activation system,  
refer to page 54.  
Concept  
A speed limit can be set that when reached will  
cause a warning to be issued.  
General information  
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐  
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐  
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Depending on the country version, you can set  
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐  
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐  
ture.  
Adjusting  
Via iDrive:  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Warning at:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Units"  
5. Select the desired menu item.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is  
displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
61  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
Activating/deactivating the  
display of the current  
vehicle position  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Speed warning"  
Concept  
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current  
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW  
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐  
tomer portal.  
Setting your current speed as  
the speed warning  
Via iDrive:  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Select current speed"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Vehicle tracking"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Activating/deactivating  
popup windows  
Control Display  
Brightness  
Via iDrive:  
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐  
played automatically on the Control Display.  
Some of these popup windows can be activated  
or deactivated.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Via iDrive:  
3. "Displays"  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐  
ness is set.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
7. Press the Controller.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐  
ness settings may not be clearly visible.  
62  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Deleting personal data in the  
vehicle  
Data protection  
Data transfer  
Concept  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐  
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This  
personal data can be permanently deleted using  
iDrive.  
Concept  
The vehicle offers different services, whose use  
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐  
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for  
some services.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐  
lowing data can be deleted:  
General information  
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐  
spective service cannot be used.  
▷ Driver profile settings.  
▷ Stored radio stations.  
Only make these settings while stationary.  
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.  
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.  
▷ Music hard disk.  
Activating/deactivating  
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.  
Via iDrive:  
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.  
▷ Phone book.  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.  
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.  
▷ Login accounts.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. "Agree and activate all"  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up  
to 15 minutes.  
All services and functions that are relevant for  
data protection will be activated or deacti‐  
vated.  
Functional requirement  
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
Configuring the data transfer  
The data transfer can be configured individually  
for separate services.  
Deleting data  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.  
Via iDrive:  
For resetting the vehicle to factory settings, refer  
to page 70.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. "Configure services"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
63  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
The following connection types require one-time  
pairing with the vehicle:  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
▷ Bluetooth.  
▷ WiFi hotspot.  
▷ Apple CarPlay.  
▷ Screen Mirroring.  
Concept  
Various connection types are available for using  
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection  
type to select depends on the mobile device and  
the desired function.  
Paired devices are automatically recognized later  
on and connected to the vehicle.  
Safety information  
General information  
The following overview shows possible functions  
and the suitable connection types for them. The  
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐  
vice.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control  
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐  
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the  
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
Function  
Connec‐  
tion type  
Making calls via the hands-free  
system.  
Bluetooth.  
Using phone functions via iDrive  
or touchscreen.  
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or  
SMS.  
Compatible devices  
General information  
Information on mobile devices compatible with  
the vehicle can be found at  
bluetooth.  
Playing music from the smart‐  
phone or the audio player.  
Bluetooth or  
USB.  
USB storage device:  
Playing music.  
USB.  
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed  
or deviating software versions.  
Playing videos from the smart‐  
phone or the USB storage de‐  
vice.  
USB.  
Displaying the vehicle identification  
number and software part number  
When looking for compatible devices, you may  
have to state the vehicle identification number  
and the software part number. These numbers  
can be displayed in the vehicle.  
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐  
cess.  
WiFi hotspot  
via WiFi.  
Using Apple CarPlay apps via  
iDrive and voice operation.  
Bluetooth  
and WiFi.  
Screen Mirroring:  
WiFi.  
Via iDrive:  
Showing the smartphone display  
on the Control Display.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
64  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
4. "Settings"  
3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text  
messages".  
5. "Bluetooth® info"  
6. "System information"  
Pairing the mobile device with  
the vehicle  
Bluetooth connection  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 64, with  
Bluetooth interface.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.  
▷ The device is ready for operation.  
5. Select the desired function:  
▷ "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"  
▷ "Audio"  
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer  
to page 65, and on the device.  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the  
Control Display.  
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth  
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.  
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may  
be required on the device; refer to the own‐  
er's manual of the device.  
A control number is displayed.  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the Control Display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐  
firm that the two match.  
Switching on Bluetooth  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
8. Select Bluetooth connection if necessary:  
"Use BMW iDrive for phone calls, Bluetooth®  
audio, and apps."  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list, refer to  
page 70.  
5. "Bluetooth®"  
6. Select setting.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
Activating/deactivating  
telephone functions  
To use all supported functions of a mobile  
phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐  
cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐  
hicle as needed.  
All requirements are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐  
pected.  
In this case, the following explanations can help:  
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or  
connected?  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐  
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.  
2. "Personalize menu"  
65  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections  
with other devices.  
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as  
audio source or as telephone.  
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐  
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new  
device search.  
Configure the mobile phone and connect it  
with the telephone function.  
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the  
phone after the last synchronization.  
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same  
function are paired.  
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload  
contacts"  
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or  
has only a limited remaining battery life.  
How can the phone connection quality be im‐  
proved?  
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the  
power-save mode where required.  
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on  
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile  
phone.  
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?  
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not  
function anymore.  
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless  
charging tray.  
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.  
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐  
rately in the sound settings.  
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for  
mobile phone operation.  
If all points in this list have been checked and the  
required function is still not available, contact the  
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme  
ambient temperatures.  
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?  
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the  
mobile phone.  
USB connection  
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐  
phone function.  
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐  
played or why are they incomplete?  
General information  
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to  
the USB interface.  
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is  
not yet complete.  
▷ Mobile phones.  
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries  
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are  
transmitted.  
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.  
▷ USB storage devices.  
Common file systems are supported. FAT32  
and exFAT are the recommended formats.  
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book  
entries with special characters.  
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐  
plied with charge current via the USB interface if  
the device supports this. Follow the maximum  
charge current of the USB interface.  
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts  
from social networks.  
▷ The number of phone book entries to be  
transmitted is too high.  
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐  
ces with data transfer:  
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐  
stance due to stored information such as  
notes.  
▷ Playing music files.  
▷ Playing videos.  
Reduce the data volume of the contact.  
66  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Follow the following when connecting:  
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐  
vice list, refer to page 70.  
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐  
tor into the USB interface.  
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.  
WiFi hotspot  
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐  
chanical damage.  
Concept  
Compatible devices with WiFi interface can use  
the Internet connection of the vehicle via the  
WiFi hotspot.  
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐  
vices available on the market, it cannot be  
guaranteed that every device is operable on  
the vehicle.  
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐  
treme environmental conditions, such as very  
high temperatures; refer to the owner's  
manual of the device.  
General information  
Up to 10 devices can be connected to the  
WiFi hotspot simultaneously.  
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐  
niques, proper playback of the media stored  
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐  
anteed in all cases.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 64, with ac‐  
tivated WiFi interface.  
▷ WiFi is activated on the vehicle.  
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored  
data, do not charge a USB storage device via  
the onboard socket, when it is connected to  
the USB interface.  
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.  
▷ Registration and data contract with a service  
provider where required.  
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is  
being used, settings may be required on the  
USB storage device, refer to the owner's  
manual of the device.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
Connecting a device to the  
Internet via the WiFi hotspot  
Not compatible USB media:  
Using the Internet for the first time via the  
WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a  
data volume purchase from a service provider.  
▷ USB hard drives.  
▷ USB hubs.  
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.  
▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.  
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.  
Depending on the country version, data volume  
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐  
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.  
Via iDrive:  
Functional requirement  
1. "COM"  
Compatible device, refer to page 64, with USB  
interface.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Connecting the device  
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable  
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to  
page 225.  
5. "Internet"  
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐  
played on the Control Display.  
67  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
6. Activate Internet usage via WiFi if necessary.  
"Open settings"  
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.  
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.  
7. Activate Internet usage.  
"Internet connection"  
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are  
activated on the iPhone.  
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple  
CarPlay preparation.  
8. Move the Controller to the left.  
9. Search for WiFi networks on the mobile de‐  
vice. Select network name on the device.  
Switching on Bluetooth and  
CarPlay  
10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐  
nect.  
Via iDrive:  
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to  
page 70.  
1. "COM"  
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the  
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can  
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐  
spot.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the following setting:  
"Apple CarPlay"  
All devices connected via the hotspot use this  
data volume.  
6. Activate the function.  
Deactivating Internet usage via  
the WiFi hotspot  
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay  
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data  
volume is used up, for instance.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Mobile devices"  
1. "COM"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
5. "Internet connection"  
6. Select the required setting.  
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth  
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.  
A control number is displayed.  
Apple CarPlay preparation  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the Control Display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐  
firm that the two match.  
Concept  
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible  
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation  
and iDrive.  
8. Select CarPlay:  
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"  
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐  
played in the device list, refer to page 70.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 64.  
68  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
Activate WiFi in the vehicle  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐  
gation, Entertainment, Communication.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Frequently Asked Questions  
All requirements are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐  
pected.  
5. "Wi-Fi®"  
Pairing a smartphone with  
Screen Mirroring  
Via iDrive:  
In this case, the following explanations can help:  
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple  
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,  
CarPlay can no longer be selected.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device  
list.  
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned  
from the list of stored connections under  
Bluetooth and under WiFi.  
5.  
"Screen Mirroring"  
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on  
the Control Display.  
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.  
If the steps listed have been carried out and the  
required function is still not available: contact the  
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐  
fied service center or repair shop.  
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings  
of the smartphone.  
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the  
device display. Select the WiFi name of the  
vehicle.  
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.  
Screen Mirroring  
The device is connected and displayed in the  
device list, refer to page 70.  
General information  
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)  
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
Managing mobile devices  
General information  
Functional requirements  
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐  
matically recognized and reconnected when  
standby state is switched on.  
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 64,  
with Screen Mirroring interface.  
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the  
smartphone.  
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the  
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been  
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐  
cle and can be used via iDrive.  
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.  
69  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐  
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐  
er's manual of the device.  
3. Select the desired device.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
▷ "Disconnect device"  
The device remains paired and can be  
connected again.  
Displaying the device list  
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐  
cle are displayed in the device list.  
▷ "Connect device"  
The functions that were assigned to the  
device before disconnecting are assigned  
to the device when it is reconnected. The  
functions may be deactivated on a device  
already connected.  
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to  
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10  
devices can be connected to the vehicle via WiFi.  
A maximum of 20 devices will be detected.  
Via iDrive:  
▷ "Delete device"  
1. "COM"  
The device is disconnected and removed  
from the device list.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is  
used. When the icon is displayed in white, this  
function is actively connected to the vehicle. The  
icon is displayed in gray when the function of the  
device is inactive.  
Priority of the phones  
When two mobile phones are connected to the  
vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile  
phones for reconnection.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
Telephone.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
Bluetooth audio.  
WiFi hotspot.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Screen Mirroring.  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Priorities for telephones"  
6. Select the desired device.  
7. Turn the controller to select the priority for  
the selected mobile phone.  
Configuring the device  
Functions can be activated or deactivated for  
paired and connected devices.  
Select the desired priority by sliding.  
If a function is assigned to a device, the function  
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐  
vice that is already connected and the device will  
be disconnected. Follow the information on the  
Control Display.  
Resetting the vehicle  
configuration  
All individual settings can be reset to the factory  
settings when the drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
70  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
When the stored settings in a driver profile are  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,  
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive  
account.  
71  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In  
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the  
remote control with you so that the vehicle can  
be opened from the outside.  
Warning  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
Remote control  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
General information  
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls  
with integrated key.  
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐  
tery, refer to page 75.  
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐  
sion, various settings, refer to page 90, can be  
configured for the button functions.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
A driver profile, refer to page 85, with personal  
settings can be assigned to a remote control.  
To provide information on maintenance require‐  
ments, the service data is stored in the remote  
control, refer to page 290.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
To prevent possible locking in of the remote  
control, take the remote control with you when  
exiting the vehicle.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
72  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and  
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on  
the remote control again to unlock the other ve‐  
hicle access points.  
Overview  
In addition, the following functions are executed:  
▷ If a driver profile, refer to page 85, was as‐  
signed to the remote control, this driver pro‐  
file will be activated and the settings that are  
stored in it will be applied.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off. For switch‐  
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to  
page 151.  
1
2
Unlocking  
Locking  
Stationary climate control through Remote  
Engine Startꢀꢁ217  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer  
to page 92, will be switched off.  
3
4
Unlocking the trunk lid  
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle  
is ready for operation, refer to page 42.  
Press and hold or press three times in quick  
succession: panic mode  
The light functions may depend on the ambient  
brightness.  
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature  
Convenient opening  
Safety information  
Unlocking  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle when unlocking with  
the remote control depends on the following set‐  
tings, refer to page 90, for unlocking and lock‐  
ing:  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when opening and  
closing the convertible top. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. When opening and closing the convertible  
top, observe the movement and keep the area  
of movement clear.  
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.  
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 147, is  
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐  
locked.  
Opening  
Press and hold the button on the re‐  
mote control.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and  
locked.  
The windows open for as long as the button on  
the remote control is pressed.  
With Comfort Access:  
Unlocking the vehicle  
If close to the vehicle, the convertible top is also  
opened.  
Press the button on the remote control.  
Press and hold the button of the remote  
control, until the convertible top is fully  
73  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
opened. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops  
the motion.  
Closing  
Press and hold the button on the remote  
control after locking.  
Locking  
The windows and the convertible top are closed  
in the area close to the vehicle, as long as the  
button on the remote control is pressed.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking with  
the remote control depends on the following set‐  
tings, refer to page 90:  
Press and hold the button of the remote  
control, until the convertible top is fully  
closed. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops  
the motion.  
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with  
a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
in and out when the vehicle is locked and un‐  
locked.  
Switching on the interior and  
exterior lights  
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer  
to page 148, is activated during locking.  
Press the button on the remote control  
with the vehicle locked.  
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐  
onds after locking.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off. For switch‐  
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to  
page 151.  
2.  
Press the button on the remote control.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐  
ing, refer to page 147, will be switched on.  
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer  
to page 92, will be switched on.  
The light functions may depend on the ambient  
brightness.  
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks  
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be  
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.  
Trunk lid  
General information  
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the  
remote control in the cargo area.  
With Comfort Access:  
convenient closing  
You can set up if the doors will be unlocked  
when the trunk lid is opened with the remote  
control. Settings, refer to page 90.  
Safety information  
Warning  
With convenient closing, body parts can be  
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is clear  
during convenient closing.  
74  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Replacing the battery  
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote  
control, refer to page 77.  
Warning  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐  
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the  
cover with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
NOTICE  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid  
is clear during opening and closing.  
Unlocking  
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐  
ing a pointed object and lift it out.  
Press and hold the button on the re‐  
mote control for approx. 1 second.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐  
self in a dangerous situation.  
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐  
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control  
three times in succession.  
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐  
tive side facing up.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
5. Press the cover closed.  
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐  
er’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop or take  
them to a collection point.  
Headlight courtesy delay feature  
on  
Press and hold the button on the re‐  
mote control for approx. 1 second.  
It is possible to adjust the duration of the head‐  
light courtesy delay feature, refer to page 148.  
Additional remote controls  
Additional remote controls are available from a  
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
75  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Switching the drive-ready state on  
via emergency detection of the  
remote control  
Loss of the remote controls  
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐  
placed by a dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
If the lost remote control has an assigned driver  
profile, refer to page 85, the connection to this  
remote control must be deleted. A new remote  
control can then be assigned to the driver profile.  
Malfunction  
General information  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the remote control has not been de‐  
tected.  
A Check Control message, refer to page 132, is  
displayed.  
Remote control detection by the vehicle may  
malfunction under the following circumstances:  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐  
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to  
page 75.  
1. Hold the remote control with its back against  
the marked area on the steering column. Pay  
attention to the display in the instrument  
cluster.  
▷ Interference of the radio connection from  
transmission towers or other equipment with  
high transmitting power.  
2. If the remote control is detected:  
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐  
onds.  
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal  
objects.  
If the remote control is not detected, slightly  
change the position of the remote control and re‐  
peat the procedure.  
Do not transport the remote control together  
with metal objects.  
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐  
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐  
rect proximity to the remote control.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐  
mote control?  
Do not transport the remote control together  
with electronic devices.  
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐  
ing process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐  
ices of the BMW Connected app include the  
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of  
the wireless charging tray.  
This requires an active BMW Connected‐  
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app  
must be installed on a smartphone.  
Place the remote control down at a different  
location.  
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be  
unlocked and locked from the outside with the  
integrated key, refer to page 77.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
76  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Removing  
Integrated key  
General information  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
without the remote control using the integrated  
key.  
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐  
ment.  
Safety information  
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Warning  
For some country versions, unlocking from the  
inside is only possible with special knowledge.  
Locking/unlocking via the door  
lock  
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with  
one hand.  
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐  
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐  
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock  
the vehicle from the outside when there are  
people in it.  
NOTICE  
The door lock is permanently joined with the  
door. The door handle can be moved. When  
pulling the door handle with the integrated key  
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be  
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐  
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling  
the outside door handle.  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the  
back under the cover and push the cover out.  
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent  
the cover from falling out of the door handle.  
77  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the cover.  
Overview  
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the  
integrated key.  
Buttons for the central locking system.  
The other doors must be unlocked or locked  
from the inside.  
Locking  
Press the button with the front doors  
closed.  
Alarm system  
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐  
cle is locked with the integrated key.  
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
The alarm system is triggered when the door is  
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the  
door lock.  
Unlocking  
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with  
the remote control, if necessary through emer‐  
gency detection of the remote control, refer to  
page 76.  
Press the button.  
Opening  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
Pull the door opener above the armrest.  
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door  
to open the door. The other doors remain  
locked.  
General information  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is  
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐  
tem and interior lights come on.  
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on  
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks  
the door, the second time opens it. The other  
doors remain locked.  
Comfort Access  
Concept  
The vehicle can be accessed without activating  
the remote control.  
78  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
All you need to do is to have the remote control  
with you, such as in your pants pocket.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
The vehicle automatically detects the remote  
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's  
interior.  
General information  
Comfort Access supports the following func‐  
tions:  
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the  
door handle.  
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.  
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐  
cle.  
Locking  
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the  
BMW Digital Key.  
General information  
▷ Unlocking the trunk lid.  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the  
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐  
tings, refer to page 90:  
Functional requirements  
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with  
a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must  
be located outside of the vehicle near the  
doors.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and  
locked.  
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not  
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.  
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer  
to page 148, is activated during locking.  
Unlocking  
General information  
Locking the vehicle  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via  
the Comfort Access depends on the following  
settings, refer to page 90:  
Close the driver's door.  
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 147, is  
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐  
locked.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and  
locked.  
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a  
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.  
1 second without grasping the door handle.  
79  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Unlocking the trunk lid  
General information  
Touchless vehicle unlocking and  
locking  
Concept  
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,  
locked doors will not be unlocked.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐  
proaches the locked vehicle with the remote  
control.  
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the  
remote control in the cargo area.  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the remote control, the vehicle will  
be locked.  
Safety information  
Warning  
General information  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized  
remote control is detected in the unlocking zone.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.  
The vehicle will be locked when the remote con‐  
trol leaves the locking zone.  
NOTICE  
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐  
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid  
is clear during opening and closing.  
If the remote control is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati‐  
cally.  
Unlocking  
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger  
seat during locking and the safety belt of the  
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt  
buckle during locking:  
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐  
locking and locking depends on the following  
settings, refer to page 90:  
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid.  
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.  
▷ If the automatic locking is active.  
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.  
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐  
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐  
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐  
cle on the driver's side.  
80  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐  
locked regardless of the side on which the  
driver approaches the vehicle.  
General information  
BMW Digital Key varies by country and may be  
unavailable.  
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is  
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐  
nal.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, a digital key must be installed on  
this smartphone. Digital keys are installed, man‐  
aged and forwarded via the BMW Connected  
app.  
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 147, is  
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐  
locked.  
A driver profile, refer to page 85, with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer  
to page 148, is activated during locking.  
When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐  
ways carry a remote control with you too, so the  
vehicle can still be accessed even if your smart‐  
phone is not working. It is also useful to carry the  
remote control with you if the vehicle has to be  
handed over to another person or a service cen‐  
ter. You can then hand over the remote control,  
instead of your smartphone.  
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded  
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and  
locked.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,  
the doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
Key card  
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
The vehicle is delivered with a key card. The key  
card can be used in the same way as a compati‐  
ble smartphone with a digital key.  
▷ If the vehicle was locked with the remote  
control, it cannot be unlocked touchless. In  
this case, unlock the vehicle using the out‐  
side door handle.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐  
tal key must be activated via iDrive, refer to  
page 83.  
▷ If the vehicle was unlocked with the remote  
control, it cannot be locked touchless without  
driving the vehicle first. In this case, lock the  
vehicle using the outside door handle.  
When you exit the vehicle, take the key card with  
you, as it can be used to start the vehicle.  
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐  
ond remote control can be located in the  
locking zone.  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and the  
smartphone uses near-field communication,  
NFC.  
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, touchless unlocking and locking  
is not possible until after the vehicle has been  
driven.  
The vehicle is unlocked with the outside door  
handle on the driver's side. The smartphone  
must be placed into the smartphone tray to pair a  
digital key and to start the engine.  
BMW Digital Key  
Concept  
The vehicle also detects a digital key when the  
smartphone is switched off.  
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐  
locked and locked, as well as started, with a  
compatible smartphone, refer to page 64.  
Functional requirements  
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
81  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
possible to allow another person to use the vehi‐  
cle without having to be at the vehicle.  
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone  
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐  
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐  
pends on the smartphone.  
The TAN and the Digital Key Code should only  
be disclosed in person or by phone.  
The transferred digital key can be removed in the  
vehicle or via the BMW Connected app at any  
time.  
▷ A digital key for the vehicle is installed on the  
smartphone.  
If the digital key has been removed via the BMW  
Connected App, the vehicle can still be unlocked  
and locked for a limited period of time and only a  
limited number of engine starts will be possible. If  
the vehicle is then used with another digital key  
or with a remote control, the removed digital key  
can no longer be used.  
▷ BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle.  
Proving authorization  
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐  
zation for his vehicle at the service center to be  
able to use BMW Digital Key. It is possible to use  
the key card without proving authorization.  
The corresponding information is shown on the  
Control Display.  
The vehicle owner configures a digital key code  
at the service center so that digital keys can be  
transferred at a later time.  
Pairing digital keys in the vehicle  
To pair a digital key, a remote control must be lo‐  
cated in the vehicle or an active digital key of the  
vehicle owner must be in the smartphone tray.  
Purchasing digital keys  
An initial digital key is provided in the BMW Con‐  
nected app when the vehicle is purchased.  
If the digital key was transferred by the vehicle  
owner, it may not be possible to meet this re‐  
quirement. In this case, it is necessary to enter  
the Digital Key Code and the TAN. The vehicle  
can already be unlocked with the transferred dig‐  
ital key before it is paired.  
Additional digital keys can be purchased via the  
BMW ConnectedDrive Store. The purchase of  
digital keys can cause costs.  
The period of validity of a digital key is limited.  
The expiration date of the validity can be  
checked in the BMW Connected app and in the  
vehicle.  
Place the smartphone with the digital key to be  
paired into the smartphone tray.  
Via iDrive:  
If a digital key has expired, the vehicle can only  
be unlocked and locked for a limited period and a  
limited number of engine starts is possible. The  
corresponding information is shown on the Con‐  
trol Display.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "BMW Digital Key"  
5. "Add new digital key"  
Transferring digital keys  
The vehicle owner can transfer a digital key for  
his/her vehicle to another person with a compati‐  
ble smartphone via the BMW Connected app.  
6. If necessary, enter the Digital Key Code and  
the TAN.  
After the digital key has been paired, its name will  
be displayed in the list of digital keys.  
When a digital key is transferred, a transaction  
number TAN will be generated. Another person  
can pair the digital key in the vehicle with this  
TAN and the Digital Key Code. This makes it  
82  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐  
locked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Activating/deactivating digital keys  
in the vehicle  
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐  
zation for his vehicle again at the service center  
to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
A digital key can be deactivated temporarily.  
To activate or deactivate a digital key, a remote  
control must be located in the vehicle or an ac‐  
tive digital key of the vehicle owner must be in  
the smartphone tray.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Settings"  
1. "CAR"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "BMW Digital Key"  
5. "Reset function"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "BMW Digital Key"  
5. Select the desired digital key.  
6. "Digital key active"  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
A deactivated digital key remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Removing digital keys in the vehicle  
To remove a digital key, a remote control must  
be located in the vehicle or another active digital  
key of the vehicle owner must be in the smart‐  
phone tray. To remove all digital keys, a remote  
control must be located in the vehicle.  
Hold the smartphone or key card directly on the  
outside door handle of the driver's door.  
The key card cannot be removed.  
Via iDrive:  
Starting the engine  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "BMW Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6.  
▷ "Remove digital key"  
The digital key will be removed from the  
list of paired digital keys.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
▷ "Remove all digital keys"  
2. Place the smartphone or key card centered  
into the smartphone tray in front of the cup  
holders.  
Resetting BMW Digital Key  
To reset BMW Digital Key, an authorized remote  
control must be located in the vehicle.  
3. After the digital key has been detected as au‐  
thorized, the engine can be started.  
83  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, it is also possible to have the doors  
unlocked. To perform settings, refer to  
page 90.  
Sale of the smartphone/vehicle  
When a smartphone with a digital key is sold, all  
digital keys should be deleted from this smart‐  
phone.  
The trunk lid cannot be opened when the vehicle  
is in valet parking mode, refer to page 89.  
When a vehicle is sold, BMW Digital Key should  
be reset in this vehicle. The new vehicle owner  
should make sure that BMW Digital Key has  
been reset. This ensures that the previous vehi‐  
cle owner no longer has access to the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Malfunction  
Remote control detection by the vehicle may  
malfunction under the following circumstances:  
Body parts can be jammed when operating the  
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear  
during opening and closing.  
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐  
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to  
page 75.  
NOTICE  
▷ Interference of the radio connection from  
transmission towers or other equipment with  
high transmitting power.  
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid  
is clear during opening and closing.  
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal  
objects.  
Do not transport the remote control together  
with metal objects.  
Opening and Closing  
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐  
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐  
rect proximity to the remote control.  
Opening from the outside  
Do not transport the remote control together  
with electronic devices.  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking  
request recognition function on the door han‐  
dles.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the  
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control  
or using the integrated key, refer to page 77.  
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle,  
then press the button on the outside of the  
trunk lid.  
Trunk lid  
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or  
carry the remote control with you and then  
press the button on the outside of the trunk  
lid.  
General information  
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the  
remote control in the cargo area.  
84  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
Press and hold the button on the re‐  
mote control for approx. 1 second.  
Driver profiles  
Depending on the setting, the doors may also  
be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐  
trol, refer to page 74.  
Concept  
Driver profiles can be created to store personal  
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple  
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver  
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐  
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in  
the driver profile.  
Opening from the inside  
Press the button in the storage compart‐  
ment of the driver's door.  
General information  
Closing  
Three personal driver profiles can be created.  
Each driver profile can be protected with a PIN to  
prevent other drivers from viewing and modifying  
the stored settings.  
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be  
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active  
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐  
lected.  
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically  
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest  
profile.  
Grasp the recess grips and pull the trunk lid  
down.  
The recognition via remote control and a digital  
key, refer to page 81, can be assigned to a driver  
profile so that the vehicle will apply the settings  
as soon as the driver unlocks the car. As soon as  
the vehicle detects the remote control or the dig‐  
ital key, the corresponding driver profile will be  
activated.  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored  
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with  
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is  
thereby possible to use these settings in other  
BMW vehicles as well.  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk lid unlocks.  
Functional requirements  
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle  
must move at a maximum of walking speed.  
Welcome screen  
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐  
come screen will be displayed.  
85  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The following actions can be carried out on the  
Welcome screen:  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐  
matically active:  
▷ Selecting a driver profile.  
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.  
▷ Starting the set-up assistant.  
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the re‐  
mote control that was used to unlock the ve‐  
hicle.  
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐  
ited period of time.  
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the  
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐  
cle.  
As soon as the engine is started or any button is  
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.  
▷ It is not clear which driver profile must be ac‐  
tivated.  
Setup assistant  
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for  
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen  
to configure the most important settings for the  
vehicle.  
The following limitations apply:  
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to  
the guest profile.  
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐  
lowing functions:  
▷ PIN protection is not possible.  
▷ Setting the system language.  
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible  
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count.  
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.  
▷ Non-ConnectedDrive countries: Assign pro‐  
file name.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:  
Enable continuous synchronization between  
the ConnectedDrive account and the driver  
profile.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. "Guest"  
Stored settings in the ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count are transferred to the vehicle. If a Con‐  
nectedDrive account has not yet been cre‐  
ated, it must be created in the  
4. "Log in"  
Creating a driver profile  
ConnectedDrive portal.  
A driver profile is created on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
▷ Confirm the consent for the transmission of  
vehicle related data.  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Configure the voice command to start the  
voice command response.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Create driver profile"  
The selected settings are stored in the active  
driver's profile.  
ConnectedDrive countries: A ConnectedDrive  
account must be assigned to a driver profile. An  
existing account can be used or a new account  
must be created.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.  
Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest  
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.  
86  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection was  
not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver's  
profile can be activated with the access data of  
the corresponding ConnectedDrive account.  
Selecting recognition  
The settings for the recognition are entered on  
the Welcome screen or via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Driver profiles"  
1. "CAR"  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "with vehicle key"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. "using PIN"  
A remote control is assigned to the driver  
profile. As soon as the vehicle detects the  
remote control, the corresponding driver  
profile will be activated.  
Changing/canceling the  
recognition function  
If the vehicle and remote control will be handed  
over for maintenance, for instance, the recogni‐  
tion function should be canceled with the remote  
control. The handed over remote control can  
then no longer be used to access the personal  
driver profile. If the driver profile was protected  
with a PIN, undesired access will no longer be  
possible.  
If the remote control is not carried with  
you or the remote control is not recog‐  
nized, the driver profile can only be se‐  
lected on the Welcome screen when the  
PIN protection has been set up.  
▷ "with Digital key"  
A digital key is assigned to the driver pro‐  
file. As soon as the vehicle recognizes the  
digital key, the corresponding driver pro‐  
file will be activated.  
If another remote control or another digital key is  
assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐  
ment must be canceled first.  
Via iDrive:  
If the smartphone with the digital key is  
not carried with you or the digital key is  
not recognized, the driver profile can only  
be selected on the Welcome screen when  
the PIN protection has been set up.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. "with vehicle key"  
or  
6. "Activate linkage"  
"with Digital key"  
5. "Activate linkage"  
Setting up PIN protection  
A driver profile without recognition and without  
PIN protection can be activated and changed by  
any driver.  
Selecting a driver profile  
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver  
profile will be selected automatically.  
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐  
vated without remote control and without digital  
key if the PIN protection was not set up.  
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will  
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection  
was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driv‐  
er's profile cannot be activated.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
87  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "Log in"  
3. "Avatar"  
4. Select the desired profile picture.  
All settings stored in the selected driver profile  
are automatically applied.  
Deleting the driver profile  
Via iDrive:  
Switching synchronization with  
the ConnectedDrive account  
on/off  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. "Settings"  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
4. "Remove driver profile"  
5. Select the desired driver profile.  
6. "Delete now"  
The settings stored in the driver's profile are  
synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive  
account. This means that it is possible to use the  
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with  
ConnectedDrive access as well.  
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile  
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐  
count will be retained.  
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive  
account is enabled in the setup assistant or via  
iDrive:  
System limits  
1. "CAR"  
A clear detection of the desired remote control  
may not be possible in the following cases, for in‐  
stance:  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. "Settings"  
4. "Synchronize driver profile"  
5. "Synchronize driver profile"  
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort  
Access and has multiple remote controls with  
him or her.  
Renaming a driver profile  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:  
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷ When multiple remote controls are located  
outside on the driver's side of the vehicle.  
The name that was assigned when the driver  
profile was set up can be changed via iDrive:  
If the remote control was not detected clearly,  
unlock the vehicle by pressing button for the de‐  
sired remote control.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "Settings"  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
A driver profile can only be created and  
5. Enter a profile name.  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account  
when cellular network reception is available.  
6.  
Select the symbol.  
The use of personal settings that are stored in  
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is  
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐  
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐  
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in  
other vehicles.  
Selecting a profile picture  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
88  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Via the vehicle settings  
Via iDrive:  
Valet parking mode  
Concept  
1. "CAR"  
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is  
locked and operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐  
sible.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
For example, this mode can be used when the  
vehicle is handed over for valet parking.  
Activating the valet parking  
mode  
General information  
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to  
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal set‐  
tings cannot be changed and personal data can‐  
not be displayed.  
General information  
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN  
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet  
parking mode at a future time.  
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:  
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.  
▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.  
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.  
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐  
pending on the active driver profile.  
Driver profile with PIN  
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐  
file.  
▷ The trunk lid can be locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.  
Functional requirements  
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.  
1. Select the desired setting:  
"Lock tailgate as well"  
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.  
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned  
ConnectedDrive account.  
2. "Activate now"  
Accessing the menu for the valet  
parking mode  
Driver profile without PIN  
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.  
1. "PIN"  
Via the switch-off screen  
2. Enter PIN.  
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-  
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for  
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Lock tailgate as well"  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon‐  
nected from the central locking system.  
Via the display bar at the upper edge  
of the Control Display  
1. Tip the Controller up  
▷ "Activate linkage"  
This PIN will be stored for the active driver  
profile.  
2. "Valet parking mode"  
4. "Activate now"  
89  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐  
Guest profile  
The guest profile is the active driver profile.  
signed to the driver profile.  
A PIN must be entered.  
Guest profile  
1. "PIN"  
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can  
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was  
activated in the guest profile.  
2. Enter PIN.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
"Lock tailgate as well"  
1. Select guest profile.  
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐  
vation.  
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking  
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver  
profile.  
4. "Activate now"  
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the  
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐  
file.  
Adjusting  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
General information  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐  
ing are possible.  
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐  
played on the Control Display.  
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐  
pends on which driver profile is selected on the  
lock screen.  
These settings are stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
Unlocking and locking  
Driver profile with PIN  
Regardless of which driver activated the valet  
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet  
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.  
Doors  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. "Settings"  
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.  
3. "Key button settings"  
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode  
must be deactivated by entering the assigned  
ConnectedDrive access data.  
4.  
Select the symbol.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Driver's door only"  
Driver profile without PIN  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks  
the entire vehicle.  
The valet parking mode was activated by another  
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a  
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data  
for his ConnectedDrive account.  
▷ "All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
1. Select driver profile.  
90  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
Automatic locking  
Via iDrive:  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Lock automatically"  
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐  
tion signals:  
The vehicle locks automatically after a  
while if no door is opened after unlocking.  
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"  
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐  
ing by one.  
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"  
The vehicle locks automatically after you  
drive off.  
▷ With alarm system:  
"Sound when locking/unlocking"  
Trunk lid  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
Trunk lid and doors  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try version, this setting may not be offered.  
Folding mirrors automatically  
Via iDrive:  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"  
3. "Key button settings"  
4.  
Select the symbol.  
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐  
rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐  
tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Tailgate"  
The trunk lid is opened.  
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"  
Automatic unlocking  
The trunk lid is opened and the doors are  
unlocked.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Comfort Access  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "Unlock at end of trip"  
Touchless locking/unlocking  
1. "CAR"  
After drive-ready state is switched off by  
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐  
hicle is automatically unlocked.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "Comfort Access"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
91  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ "Unlock when approaching"  
▷ "Lock when walking away"  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door is  
opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
Establishing idle state after  
opening the front doors  
Via iDrive:  
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 93.  
1. "CAR"  
Opening the trunk lid with the  
alarm system switched on  
The trunk lid can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/Access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Opening the front doors establishes the idle  
state, refer to page 41.  
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐  
tored again provided the doors are locked. The  
hazard warning system flashes once.  
Alarm system  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐  
self in a dangerous situation.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐  
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.  
▷ Movements in the car's interior.  
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control  
three times in succession.  
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐  
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐  
ing the vehicle.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
Indicator light on the interior  
mirror  
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.  
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard  
Diagnosis.  
The alarm system signals these changes visually  
and acoustically:  
▷ Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic  
alarm may be suppressed.  
▷ Visual alarm:  
By flashing the exterior lighting.  
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐  
onds:  
Switching on/off  
The alarm system is switched on.  
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either  
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,  
the alarm system is switched off and on at the  
same time.  
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,  
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:  
92  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are  
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access  
points are secured.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐  
sor can be switched off in such situations.  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor  
and interior motion sensor  
When the still open access points are closed,  
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐  
sor will be switched on.  
Press the button on the remote control  
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is  
locked.  
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐  
onds and then continues to flash.  
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐  
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no  
longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor  
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.  
An alarm has been triggered.  
Switching off the alarm  
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,  
if needed, through emergency detection of  
the remote control, refer to page 76.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.  
The alarm system responds in situations such as  
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is  
towed.  
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the  
remote control on your person, grasp the  
driver side or front passenger side door han‐  
dle completely.  
Interior motion sensor  
The car's interior is monitored to the height of  
the seats. The alarm system is switched on to‐  
gether with the interior motion sensor even when  
the convertible top is open. Falling objects such  
as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Warning  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor  
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized  
action occurred.  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the windows is clear  
during opening and closing.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.  
▷ In duplex garages.  
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at  
sea or on a trailer.  
▷ With animals in the vehicle.  
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐  
ing.  
93  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Jam protection system  
Concept  
The jam protection prevents objects or body  
parts becoming jammed between the door frame  
and window while a window is being closed.  
General information  
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐  
terrupted and the window opens slightly.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Functional requirements  
Warning  
The windows can be operated under the follow‐  
ing conditions.  
Accessories on the windows such as antennas  
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of  
movement of the windows.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.  
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.  
Opening  
Closing without the jam protection  
system  
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might  
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window opens while the switch is being  
held.  
1.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐  
ance point.  
The window closes with limited jam protec‐  
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific  
threshold, closing is interrupted.  
The window opens automatically. Pressing  
the switch again stops the motion.  
Closing  
▷
2.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold  
it there.  
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window closes while the switch is being  
held.  
The window closes without jam protection.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist‐  
ance point.  
Convertible top  
The window closes automatically if the door  
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.  
General information  
The convertible top can be opened or closed at  
speeds up to approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.  
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 78.  
94  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of ap‐  
prox. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is  
being moved, the convertible top movement  
stops.  
Warning  
When operating the convertible top while driv‐  
ing, the view to the rear may be limited. At  
speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h the convertible  
top stops in its current position. There is a dan‐  
ger of accidents and property damage. When  
operating the convertible top while driving, ob‐  
serve traffic attentively and, if necessary, re‐  
duce speed. Do not operate while backing up  
or in windy weather.  
Follow the following information:  
▷ Close the convertible top when the vehicle is  
parked. A closed convertible top protects it  
from weather-related damage and to some  
extent from theft.  
▷ Even when the convertible top is closed, only  
store valuables in the locked cargo area.  
▷ At higher speeds, negative pressure pro‐  
duced in the car's interior causes the  
convertible top to begin to flutter. Increase  
the air flow via the ventilation to prevent neg‐  
ative pressure in the vehicle.  
Warning  
The convertible top is not suitable for the  
mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐  
rier could come loose. There is a risk of acci‐  
dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to  
the convertible top.  
▷ It is not possible to start the engine and oper‐  
ate the convertible top simultaneously. When  
the engine is started using the Start/Stop  
button or using the Auto Start/Stop function,  
the convertible top movement is briefly inter‐  
rupted.  
Warning  
A convertible top that is not completely open or  
closed is not locked and can open by itself  
while driving due to the airstream. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the convertible top is always  
completely open or closed.  
▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the  
convertible top.  
▷ In order to protect the battery, move the  
convertible top only when the engine is run‐  
ning.  
▷ Remove objects stowed in the convertible  
top compartment before opening the  
convertible top.  
NOTICE  
▷ Before closing the convertible top, remove  
any foreign objects from the windshield  
frame; otherwise, closing may be prevented.  
Incorrect operation can damage the convertible  
top and other parts of the vehicle.  
There is a risk of damage to property. During  
operation, heed the following points:  
Safety information  
▷ Keep the area of movement of the  
convertible top clear because the  
convertible top swivels out and upward.  
Maximum area of movement: 98.5 in‐  
ches/2.5 meters.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when opening and  
closing the convertible top. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. When opening and closing the convertible  
top, observe the movement and keep the area  
of movement clear.  
▷ Fully close the trunk lid.  
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for  
more than a day while it is wet.  
95  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷ Do not open the convertible top, if it is  
wet, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.  
Functional requirements  
The following requirements must be fulfilled in  
order to be able to move the convertible top.  
▷ Do not place objects on the convertible  
top.  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.  
▷ The rollover protection system may not be  
triggered.  
▷ Standby state is switched on and the brake  
pedal is depressed.  
▷ Do not operate the convertible top on un‐  
even sections of road.  
▷ The external temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
▷ Always open or close the convertible top  
completely. The convertible top is only  
locked in its end positions.  
▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system is  
sufficient.  
▷ The convertible top drive is not overheating.  
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high.  
Overview  
▷ The windows can be opened and closed au‐  
tomatically.  
With manual transmission  
If one of these requirements is not met, a check  
control message is displayed.  
Operating from the inside  
Opening  
Push the switch and hold it.  
The windows roll down and the convertible top  
opens while the switch is being pushed.  
Convertible top switch  
Closing  
With Steptronic transmission  
Pull the switch and hold it.  
The windows are lowered, the convertible top is  
closed, and the windows are raised again while  
the switch is being pulled.  
Preventing an interruption  
Push or pull the switch until the convertible top is  
completely open or closed and the end of the  
procedure is indicated by a Check Control mes‐  
sage. Always make sure that the side covers are  
completely closed. The convertible top can only  
be locked if the convertible top is completely  
open or closed.  
Convertible top switch  
96  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The convertible top movement is interrupted if  
the switch is released. The sequence can be  
continued in the desired direction using the  
switch.  
of the convertible top and the convertible top  
well storage cover is free. Only close the  
convertible top manually with two people.  
The convertible is not locked in this case. Oper‐  
ate switch again until the convertible operation is  
terminated.  
Before closing  
1. Lower the side windows completely.  
2. Switching off, standby state, refer to  
page 113.  
Operation from the outside  
3. Take the hexagon wrench out of the onboard  
vehicle tool kit.  
When equipped with Comfort Access the  
convertible top can also be operated from out‐  
side.  
Lifting out convertible top  
1. Carefully swivel the covers up on both sides  
until they are open.  
Convenient opening and convenient closing via  
the remote control, refer to page 72.  
Manually closing the convertible  
top  
General information  
If there is a malfunction, the convertible top can  
be manually closed. Two persons are necessary  
to do this.  
If possible, have a convertible top manually  
closed by a dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
2. Position the hexagon wrench in the screw.  
Safety information  
Warning  
In case of an electrical malfunction, the  
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully  
open position. The convertible top will rise up  
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of  
accident. Do not open the closed convertible  
top manually.  
3. Turn the screw on the left side of the vehicle  
counterclockwise to the stop. Turn the screw  
Warning  
While manually lowering the convertible top,  
body parts can be jammed. With one-sided op‐  
eration, the convertible top can be damaged.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to  
property. Make sure that the area of movement  
97  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
on the right side of the vehicle clockwise to  
the stop.  
Convertible top locking  
1. Carefully remove the cover in the center of  
the front convertible top frame.  
4. Lift the convertible top out on the front on  
both sides, and swing it forward.  
2. Take the square socket adapter out of the  
cover.  
3. Insert the square socket adapter in the hexa‐  
gon wrench.  
4. Position the hexagon wrench with inserted  
adapter on the convertible top locking (arrow).  
98  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turn the hexagon wrench clockwise to the  
stop to open the locking hooks.  
Safety information  
Warning  
A wind deflector that has not been mounted  
correctly may fly off and be thown into the vehi‐  
cle or endanger other road users. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Before drive-off, make sure that the wind de‐  
flector is completely pushed down to the stop  
and mounted.  
5. While one person presses the center of the  
front convertible top frame from the outside  
onto the windshield frame: turn the hexagon  
wrench counterclockwise to the stop to close  
the locking hooks. The front convertible top  
frame must be locked in the windshield  
frame.  
Installing  
6. Have the convertible top checked by a deal‐  
er’s service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
Have the convertible top checked by a dealer’s  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Push the wind deflector down evenly to the stop.  
The magnetic retaining force must be noticeable.  
Wind deflector  
Removing  
Concept  
The wind deflector reduces the air movement in  
the car's interior when driving with the  
convertible top down.  
The wind deflector is most effective when the  
side windows are closed.  
General information  
The magnetic retaining force must be overcome  
when pulling the wind deflector out of the  
guides.  
The integrated wind deflector is held in position  
by magnetic force.  
The magnets are located on the lower end of the  
wind deflector fitting.  
Do not store any electronic storage media, cards  
with magnetic strips or chip cards in the immedi‐  
ate vicinity of the magnets.  
99  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and  
Warning  
options  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the  
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐  
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety  
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or  
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting  
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the  
most upright position as possible and do not  
adjust again while driving.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Warning  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seating  
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐  
mation in the following chapters:  
Electrically adjustable seats  
General information  
▷ Seats, refer to page 100.  
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is  
stored for the driver profile, refer to page 85, cur‐  
rently used. When a driver profile is selected, the  
stored position is called up automatically.  
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 102.  
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 104.  
▷ Airbags, refer to page 152.  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function, refer to page 107.  
Seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐  
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.  
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when  
the vehicle is stationary.  
100  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Seat tilt  
Move switch up or down.  
1
2
3
4
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt  
Backrest tilt  
Backrest width  
Lumbar support  
Backrest tilt  
Forward/backward  
Move switch forward or backward.  
Thigh support  
Push switch forward or backward.  
Height  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
Lumbar support  
Concept  
Push switch up or down.  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region  
101  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are  
supported for upright posture.  
Safety belts  
Number of safety belts and  
safety belt buckles  
The vehicle is fitted with two safety belts to en‐  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐  
fer protection when adjusted correctly.  
Adjusting  
▷ Press the front/rear section of  
the button:  
The curvature is increased/  
decreased.  
▷ Press the upper/lower section  
of the button:  
General information  
Always make sure that safety belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐  
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐  
tute for safety belts.  
The curvature is shifted up/  
down.  
Backrest width  
Concept  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral  
support when taking corners.  
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will  
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build  
if the seat is correctly adjusted.  
Safety information  
General information  
You can change the backrest width by adjusting  
the side wings of the backrest.  
Warning  
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of the  
safety belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do  
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐  
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐  
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐  
ported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,  
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.  
Adjusting  
▷ Press the front section of the  
button:  
The backrest width de‐  
creases.  
▷ Press the rear section of the  
button:  
Warning  
The backrest width increases.  
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety  
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts  
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened  
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐  
stance in the event of an accident or during  
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.  
102  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt  
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Warning  
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety  
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the  
following situations:  
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other  
way.  
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were  
modified.  
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐  
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,  
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐  
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have  
the safety belts checked after an accident at  
the dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Unbuckling the safety belt  
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.  
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up  
mechanism.  
Belt guide  
Correct use of safety belts  
▷ Insert the safety belt into the belt guide.  
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to  
your body over your lap and shoulders.  
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The safety belt may not press on  
your stomach.  
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or  
fragile objects.  
When buckling safety belts, make sure the belt  
guide is closed.  
▷ Avoid thick clothing.  
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward  
around your upper body.  
The magnet may open if the seat position has  
been changed.  
Buckling the safety belt  
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
Safety belt reminder for driver's  
seat and front passenger seat  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light lights up and a signal  
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts  
are positioned correctly. The safety belt  
103  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
reminder can also be activated if objects are  
placed on the front passenger seat.  
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Adjusting the height  
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐  
justed.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Adjusting the distance  
The distance to the back of the head is adjusted  
via the backrest tilt.  
A missing protective effect due to removed or  
not correctly adjusted head restraints can  
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There  
is a risk of injury.  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is  
as close as possible to the back of the head.  
Removing  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
▷ Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐  
ports the back of the head at as close to  
eye level as possible.  
Exterior mirrors  
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
General information  
The mirror on the front passenger side is more  
curved than the driver's side mirror.  
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile,  
refer to page 85, currently in use. When a driver  
profile is selected, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
The current exterior mirror position can be stored  
using the memory function, refer to page 107.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐  
tective effect in the head and neck area. There  
is a risk of injury.  
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than  
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐  
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind  
by looking over your shoulder.  
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
104  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Overview  
▷ In vehicle washes.  
▷ On narrow roads.  
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐  
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as  
needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
1
2
3
Adjusting  
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in and out  
Automatic dimming feature  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐  
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior  
mirror, refer to page 106, are used to control  
this.  
Adjusting electrically  
Press the button.  
The selected mirror moves along with the  
button movement.  
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior  
mirror  
Selecting a mirror  
Concept  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other format‐  
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,  
for instance.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.  
Activating  
Folding in and out  
1.  
slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Before washing,  
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Deactivating  
Slide the switch to the passenger's side  
mirror position.  
Press the button.  
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.  
15 mph/20 km/h.  
105  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Interior mirror, manually  
dimmable  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can  
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.  
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the  
vehicle is stationary only.  
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐  
ror, flip the lever forward.  
Manual steering wheel  
adjustment  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Photocells are used for control:  
▷ In the mirror glass.  
1. Fold the lever down.  
▷ On the back of the mirror.  
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred  
height and angle to suit your seating position.  
Overview  
3. Fold the lever back up.  
Heated steering wheel  
Overview  
Functional requirements  
▷ Keep the photocells clean.  
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Button for heated steering wheel  
106  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Switching on/off  
Warning  
Press the button.  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes  
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering  
wheel activates automatically if the function was  
switched on at the end of the last trip.  
Overview  
Memory function  
Concept  
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐  
essary, retrieved using the memory function:  
▷ Seat position.  
▷ Exterior mirror position.  
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile, refer to  
page 85.  
Storing  
1. Set the desired position.  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷ Backrest width.  
2.  
Press the button. The writing on the  
button lights up.  
▷ Lumbar support.  
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is  
lit. A signal sounds.  
Safety information  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the  
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.  
The procedure stops when a switch for setting  
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐  
tons is pressed again.  
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position  
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.  
107  
 
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Seat heating  
Switching on  
Press the button once for each temper‐  
ature level.  
The maximum temperature is reached when  
three LEDs are lit.  
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 243,  
the heating output is reduced.  
Switching off  
Press and hold the button until the bar  
display on the climate control display  
goes out.  
108  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
Vehicle features and  
options  
General information  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Before using a child restraint system on the front  
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and  
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐  
activated. For automatic deactivation of front-  
seat passenger airbags, refer to page 154.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air‐  
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐  
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐  
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Warning  
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on  
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐  
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐  
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can  
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐  
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety  
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in  
the event of an accident or during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or  
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,  
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
109  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Deactivating airbags  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
General information  
Warning  
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐  
ating and safety information of the child restraint  
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,  
and using child restraint systems.  
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air‐  
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐  
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐  
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.  
Safety information  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the front passenger  
side are deactivated.  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint systems  
and their fastening systems which have been  
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐  
ited or lost. For instance, a child can may not be  
sufficiently restrained in the event of an acci‐  
dent or braking and evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injuries or danger to life.  
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐  
tomatically, refer to page 154.  
Seat position and height  
Before installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go  
and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.  
This seat position and height ensure the best  
possible position for the belt and offers optimal  
protection in the event of an accident.  
Do not use damaged child restraint systems or  
child restraint systems that have been exposed  
to an accident, and replace them instead.  
Have damaged child restraint systems or child  
restraint systems exposed to an accident and  
their fastening systems checked and, where  
applicable, replaced by the dealer's service  
center or another qualified service center or re‐  
pair shop.  
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in  
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the  
front passenger seat carefully forward until the  
best possible belt guide position is reached.  
Backrest width  
Warning  
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a  
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,  
open the backrest width completely. Do not  
change the backrest width again and do not call  
up a memory position.  
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐  
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐  
ment or improper installation of the child seat.  
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make  
sure that the child restraint system fits securely  
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the  
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐  
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats  
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.  
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐  
straints or remove them.  
110  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Child seat security  
NOTICE  
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of  
child restraint systems are only provided for  
these retaining straps. When other objects are  
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There  
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount  
child restraint systems to the upper anchors.  
Anchors  
The safety belt on the passenger's side can be  
locked to fasten child restraint systems.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
The respective symbol shows  
the anchor for the upper retain‐  
ing strap. Seats with an upper  
top tether are marked with this  
symbol. It can be found on the  
rear seat backrest or the rear  
window shelf.  
Locking the safety belt  
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
safety belt.  
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it  
tight against the child restraint system. The  
safety belt is locked.  
Routing the retaining strap  
Unlocking the safety belt  
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐  
pletely.  
Child restraint systems  
with tether strap  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Direction of travel  
Head restraint  
Safety information  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Anchor/eye  
Warning  
Vehicle floor  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐  
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does  
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as  
it passes the upper anchor.  
Fit  
Upper retaining strap  
111  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Attaching the upper retaining  
strap to the anchor  
1. Open the anchor cover.  
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the head  
restraint to the anchor.  
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
anchor.  
4. Tighten the retaining strap.  
112  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Auto Start/Stop function  
Concept  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
General information  
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐  
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The  
function is activated from speeds of approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Start/Stop button  
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to  
page 127, the system is automatically activated  
or deactivated.  
Concept  
Pressing the Start/Stop button  
switches drive-ready state on or  
off, refer to page 41.  
Engine stop  
Steptronic transmission: the  
drive-ready state is switched on  
Functional requirements  
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐  
ing the Start/Stop button.  
Steptronic transmission  
The engine is switched off automatically during a  
stop under the following conditions:  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches  
drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐  
fer to page 41, is switched back on.  
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position  
D.  
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the  
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by  
Automatic Hold.  
Driving away  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Apply drive mode.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
4. Drive away.  
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐  
er's door is closed.  
Steptronic transmission: manual  
engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automatically  
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be  
switched off manually:  
113  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from  
the current pedal position.  
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐  
matic climate control is running.  
▷ Engage selector lever position P.  
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled to the required level.  
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐  
gine switches off.  
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation  
when the automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
Air conditioner when the engine is  
switched off  
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced  
when the engine is switched off.  
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐  
perature.  
▷ Engine cooling is required.  
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐  
ing wheel is being turned.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
▷ At higher elevations.  
General information  
The display in the tachometer in‐  
dicates that the Auto Start/Stop  
function is ready for an Automatic  
engine start.  
▷ The hood is unlocked.  
▷ The parking assistant is activated.  
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.  
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐  
tion in N or R.  
The display indicates that the  
conditions for an automatic en‐  
gine stop have not been met.  
▷ After driving in reverse.  
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
Steptronic transmission  
Total time with switched-off engine  
ECO PRO, refer to page 243,  
driving mode: depending on the  
vehicle equipment, the total time  
that the engine has been  
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐  
ing preconditions:  
switched off using the Auto Start/  
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐  
gine stop.  
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.  
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the  
accelerator pedal.  
The total time is automatically reset every time  
the vehicle is refueled.  
Driving off  
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.  
Functional limitations  
The engine is not switched off automatically in  
the following situations:  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it will  
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐  
lowing conditions are met:  
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.  
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.  
114  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
is not switched off automatically. A message  
appears on the Control Display, depending  
on the situation.  
▷ The hood was unlocked.  
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle  
needs to drive off immediately, the engine is  
started automatically.  
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length  
of time.  
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop  
button.  
The function may be restricted if the navigation  
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐  
ample.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐  
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Activating/deactivating the  
system manually  
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when  
the air conditioning is switched on.  
Concept  
The engine is not automatically switched off.  
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when  
the heating is switched on.  
The engine is started during an automatic engine  
stop.  
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation  
when the automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
Using the button  
▷ The steering wheel is turned.  
▷ Steptronic transmission:  
Change from selector lever position D to N or  
R.  
▷ Steptronic transmission:  
Change from selector lever position P to N,  
D, or R.  
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.  
Press the button.  
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop  
function  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐  
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety  
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The  
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐  
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a  
proactive manner.  
Steptronic transmission: via  
selector lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated  
in selector lever position M/S.  
Via the Driving Dynamics Control  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated  
in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics  
Control.  
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping  
time is expected to be very short, the engine  
115  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Parking brake  
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is  
deactivated.  
Concept  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle  
from rolling when it is parked.  
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐  
tivated.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can  
be switched off permanently, for instance when  
leaving it.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
Steptronic transmission  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.  
▷ Standby state is switched on.  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐  
matically.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
General information  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function  
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,  
for instance if no driver is detected.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
Malfunction  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches  
off the engine automatically. A Check Control  
message is displayed. It is possible to continue  
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
116  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
2.  
Steptronic transmission: press the  
switch while the brake is pressed or selector  
lever position P is set.  
The LED and indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
Automatic release  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive away.  
The LED and indicator light go out.  
Automatic Hold  
Concept  
Parking brake  
Setting  
With a stationary vehicle  
This system assists the driver by automatically  
setting and releasing the brake, such as when  
moving in stop-and-go traffic.  
Pull the switch.  
The LED lights up.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it  
is stationary.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is  
set.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle  
from rolling backward when driving off.  
General information  
Under the following conditions, the parking brake  
is automatically engaged:  
While driving  
General information  
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.  
To use as emergency brake while driving.  
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle  
is stationary.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes  
hard while the switch is being pulled.  
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill  
using the parking brake.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and  
the brake lights illuminate.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle  
is stationary.  
Releasing  
Releasing manually  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
117  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Overview  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
Automatic Hold  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
Establishing function readiness of  
Automatic Hold  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED lights up.  
Warning  
The indicator light lights up green.  
Automatic Hold is functional.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the  
following actions:  
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐  
lected setting is active.  
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.  
▷ Releasing the parking brake.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Function readiness is established and the driv‐  
er's door is closed.  
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐  
dows.  
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.  
▷ Using vehicle equipment.  
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance  
when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐  
tomatically secured against rolling.  
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not  
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐  
hicle. Take the remote control with you when  
exiting and lock the vehicle.  
The indicator light lights up green.  
Driving off  
NOTICE  
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐  
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐  
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic  
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.  
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐  
cator light is no longer illuminated.  
118  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this process  
are normal.  
Activating the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is  
exited.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
Turn signal  
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the  
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐  
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐  
vated.  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in  
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on  
the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Switching function readiness off  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
Using turn signals  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
press additionally on the brake pedal, when  
switching off.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the  
parking brake:  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
Triple turn signal activation  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.  
Via iDrive:  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐  
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐  
hicle.  
After a power failure  
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a  
power failure:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "One-touch turn signal"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
1. Switch on standby state.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on the  
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set  
and then push.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
119  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐  
ers are folded in when switching on.  
Signaling briefly  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it  
there for as long as you want the turn signal to  
flash.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the  
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐  
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐  
shield prior to switching the wipers on.  
High beams,  
headlight flasher  
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.  
Switching on  
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.  
The high beams light up when the low beams  
are switched on.  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.  
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.  
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.  
Wiper system  
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
General information  
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as  
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them  
to become worn more quickly.  
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system  
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers  
resume at their previous speed.  
Switching off and brief wipe  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the  
Press the lever down.  
120  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it  
reaches its standard position.  
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not  
start.  
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the  
standard position.  
Deactivating  
Press the lever back into the standard position.  
The lever automatically returns to its initial  
position when released.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Rain sensor  
Concept  
The rain sensor automatically controls the time  
between wipes depending on the intensity of the  
rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly  
in front of the interior mirror.  
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of  
the rain sensor.  
Safety information  
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can  
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐  
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.  
Windshield washer system  
Safety information  
Warning  
Activating  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at  
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There  
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐  
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use  
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the  
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is  
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the  
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir  
is empty.  
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐  
tion, arrow 1.  
Wiping is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
121  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Cleaning the windshield  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the  
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐  
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐  
shield prior to switching the wipers on.  
Folding away the wipers  
1. Switch on standby state.  
Pull the lever.  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the  
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.  
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐  
shield and activates the wipers briefly.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically  
heated while standby state is switched on.  
Fold-away position of the wipers  
Concept  
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be  
folded away from the windshield.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the  
windshield.  
General information  
Important, for instance when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the  
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐  
ers are folded in when switching on.  
Folding down the wipers  
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper  
system must be reactivated.  
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐  
shield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold  
the wiper lever down again.  
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are  
ready again for operation.  
122  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and  
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐  
gaged.  
Steptronic transmission  
Concept  
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐  
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐  
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.  
▷ After the standby state has been switched off  
when selector lever position N is engaged.  
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the  
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal  
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary  
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐  
gaged.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Engaging selector lever  
positions  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing, for instance with the parking brake.  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the  
brake pedal until you are ready to start.  
Selector lever positions  
Drive mode D  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐  
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐  
tomatically.  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to  
change from selector lever position P to another  
selector lever position.  
R is reverse  
The selection lever position P cannot be  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
changed until all technical requirements are met.  
Engaging selector lever position D,  
N, R  
Neutral N  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,  
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to  
page 124, in selector lever position N.  
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty  
operation:  
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐  
tion R.  
Parking position P  
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐  
sition P into another selector lever position.  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
wheels in selector lever position P.  
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
P is engaged automatically  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐  
cally in situations such as the following:  
123  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐  
lector lever lock.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on  
the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer  
to page 117.  
4. Depress the brake pedal.  
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐  
lector lever position N.  
6. Switch off drive-ready state.  
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐  
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The  
selector lever automatically returns to the  
center position when released.  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
The vehicle can roll.  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not  
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.  
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever  
position P is automatically engaged after approx.  
35 minutes.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to  
change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed, refer to page 126.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving  
performance.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐  
ance point at the full throttle position.  
Press button P.  
Sport program M/S  
Concept  
The shifting points and shifting times in the  
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without  
its own power for a short distance, for instance in  
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.  
124  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up  
later and the shifting times are shorter.  
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it  
backward, arrows 2.  
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is  
changed.  
Activating the Sport program  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument  
cluster, for instance M1.  
Shifting  
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐  
ward.  
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.  
The transmission continues shifting automati‐  
cally in certain situations, for instance when  
speed limits are reached.  
Press the selector lever to the left from selector  
lever position D.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument  
cluster, for instance S1.  
Steptronic Sport transmission:  
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S  
manual mode  
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 128, is se‐  
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does  
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode  
once the maximum speed is reached.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐  
vated.  
Ending the Sport program  
Push the selector lever to the right.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration,  
this function is active independently of the driv‐  
ing mode.  
Manual mode M/S  
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐  
down.  
Concept  
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.  
Ending the manual mode  
Push the selector lever to the right.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Activating manual mode  
1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐  
tor lever position D, arrow 1.  
Shift paddles  
Concept  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both  
hands on the steering wheel.  
125  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by  
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.  
General information  
Shifting  
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐  
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and  
road speeds.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Short-term manual mode  
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐  
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.  
The selector lever position is dis‐  
played, for example P.  
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐  
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles  
for a certain amount of time, the transmission  
switches back to automatic mode.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as  
follows:  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.  
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐  
dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.  
General information  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to  
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.  
Continuous manual mode  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the  
engine.  
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐  
dle switches into manual mode permanently.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling  
away.  
Steptronic Sport transmission  
With the appropriate transmission version, the  
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐  
neously activating kickdown and operating the  
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-  
term manual mode.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must  
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button  
pressed.  
Shifting  
3. With your free hand, press the button on the  
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector  
lever into selector lever position N and hold,  
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.  
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.  
126  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument  
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF  
lights up.  
3. Engage selector lever position S.  
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle  
position, kickdown.  
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within  
3 seconds, release the brake.  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area  
and secure it against moving on its own.  
Repeated use during a trip  
For additional information, see the chapter on  
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 299.  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐  
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes  
before Launch Control can be used again.  
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐  
ditions, when used again.  
Launch Control  
Concept  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐  
rounding conditions.  
After using Launch Control  
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐  
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.  
General information  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,  
refer to page 238, period.  
Driving Dynamics Control  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
Concept  
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the  
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Launch Control is available when the engine is at  
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐  
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at  
least 6 miles/10 km.  
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the  
situation using various driving modes.  
General information  
The following systems are affected, for instance:  
Start with launch control  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
▷ Engine characteristics.  
▷ Steptronic transmission.  
2.  
Press the button.  
127  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷ Adaptive M chassis.  
▷ Steering.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐  
cally.  
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.  
▷ Cruise control.  
Driving modes in detail  
COMFORT  
Overview  
Concept  
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient  
driving.  
Switching on  
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐  
FORT is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
SPORT  
The selected driving mode is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Concept  
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐  
mized chassis and suspension.  
Switching on  
Driving modes  
Press the button repeatedly until  
SPORT is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
SPORT INDIVIDUAL  
Button  
Driving  
mode  
Configura‐  
tion  
Concept  
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT  
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.  
SPORT  
SPORT  
SPORT  
INDIVIDUAL  
SPORT  
PLUS  
Configuration  
Via iDrive:  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
ADAPTIVE  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
ADAPTIVE  
1. "CAR"  
INDIVIDUAL  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
128  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐  
tings:  
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".  
SPORT PLUS  
Concept  
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".  
ADAPTIVE  
Concept  
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐  
justed drive.  
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is  
automatically modified to the driving situation  
and driving style.  
Switching on  
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road  
sections are considered.  
Press the button repeatedly until  
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster.  
Switching on  
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐  
played in the instrument cluster.  
ECO PRO  
Concept  
INDIVIDUAL configuration  
General information  
The individual configuration of the driving mode  
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set  
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐  
ing mode is called up again.  
Efficient driving setting.  
Switching on  
Press the button repeatedly until ECO  
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐  
ter.  
Activating configuration of the  
driving mode  
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL  
Press the button for the desired driving mode  
several times.  
Concept  
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO  
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.  
Configuration  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
129  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Overview  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
1
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ135  
Rangeꢀꢁ137  
2
3
Speedometer  
Central display areaꢀꢁ130  
Service requirementsꢀꢁ137  
Navigation display  
Instrument cluster  
Concept  
The instrument cluster is a variable display.  
When you change to a different program via Driv‐  
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐  
ment cluster adapt to the respective driving  
mode.  
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐  
tion Camera  
Tachometerꢀꢁ136  
Selection listsꢀꢁ140  
Widgets in the instrument clusterꢀꢁ131  
Trip odometer, see Trip dataꢀꢁ141  
ECO PRO displaysꢀꢁ243  
Status, Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ127  
Transmission displayꢀꢁ123  
Engine temperatureꢀꢁ136  
External temperatureꢀꢁ137  
Check Controlꢀꢁ132  
General information  
The display change in the instrument cluster can  
be deactivated via iDrive.  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
6
7
8
9
Speed Limit Assistꢀꢁ187  
Speed Limit Infoꢀꢁ139  
Timeꢀꢁ60  
Central display area  
Depending on the equipment, the following is  
displayed in the central display area of the instru‐  
ment cluster:  
130  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,  
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐  
view with destination guidance information.  
Widgets in the instrument  
cluster  
▷ Displays showing service requirements.  
Concept  
Displays for specific functions can be displayed  
in the tachometer in the instrument cluster.  
Some displays in the central display area can be  
configured individually. Setting the displays in the  
central display area, refer to page 131.  
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐  
ment version and country variant.  
The following displays can be selected:  
▷ Trip data, refer to page 141.  
▷ Torque and power, refer to page 142.  
▷ Acceleration power, refer to page 142.  
Driving mode view  
Concept  
When the driving mode view is deactivated, the  
displays in the instrument cluster remain un‐  
changed and do not adapt to the respective driv‐  
ing mode when the program is changed via Driv‐  
ing Dynamics Control.  
▷ Current entertainment source, for instance,  
radio, refer to Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment and Communication.  
▷ Efficiency display, refer to page 132.  
Selecting  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Driving mode view"  
Adjusting  
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can  
be configured individually.  
Continue to press the button on the turn signal  
lever until the desired widget is selected.  
Display  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
131  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range, refer  
to page 243.  
Efficiency display  
Concept  
Information about driving style and consumption  
can be displayed in the form of a consumption  
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for  
example.  
Check Control  
Concept  
The Check Control system monitors functions in  
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in  
the monitored systems.  
General information  
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐  
ent information will be displayed:  
General information  
Driving  
mode  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐  
bination of indicator or warning lights and text  
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐  
cable, in the Head-up Display.  
COMFORT  
SPORT  
Current consumption.  
Average consumption.  
Energy recovery.  
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a  
text message may appear on the Control Display.  
ECO PRO  
ECO PRO bonus range.  
Distance traveled in Coasting  
mode.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Current consumption.  
Average consumption  
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐  
sumption when driving a specific route.  
Current consumption  
The current consumption displays the current  
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐  
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-  
friendly manner.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Continuous display  
Some Check Control messages are displayed  
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐  
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐  
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐  
utively.  
Energy recovery  
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the  
vehicle is converted into electric energy during  
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged  
and fuel consumption can be reduced.  
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐  
onds. After this time, they are displayed again  
automatically.  
ECO PRO bonus range  
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐  
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐  
132  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Temporary display  
Messages after trip completion  
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐  
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check  
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐  
played again later.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐  
played again after drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
Indicator/warning lights  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Concept  
Via iDrive:  
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster  
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐  
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in  
the monitored systems.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control"  
4. Select the SMS text message.  
General information  
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐  
ety of combinations and colors.  
Display  
Check Control  
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐  
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
At least one Check Control message is  
displayed or stored.  
Red lights  
SMS text messages  
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐  
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check  
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐  
tor/warning lights.  
Safety belt reminder  
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:  
safety belt on the driver or passenger  
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐  
minder can also be activated if objects are placed  
on the front passenger seat.  
Supplementary SMS text messages  
Additional information, such as the reason for an  
error or malfunction or the required action, can  
be called up via Check Control.  
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned  
correctly.  
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐  
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.  
Airbag system  
Airbag system and belt tensioner may  
not be working.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐  
ther help can be selected.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately  
by a dealer's service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
133  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
DSC, refer to page 172, and DTC, refer to  
page 174.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
For releasing the parking brake, refer to  
page 117.  
Flat Tire Monitor FTM  
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of  
tire inflation pressure in a tire.  
Brake system  
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.  
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.  
Braking system impaired. Continue to  
drive moderately.  
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 272.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately  
by a dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM  
The indicator light lights up: the Tire  
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐  
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐  
formation in the Check Control message.  
Yellow lights  
Anti-lock Braking System ABS  
The indicator light flashes and then continuously  
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐  
sure can be detected.  
The Brake Assistant function may not  
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the  
longer braking distance into account.  
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices  
with the same radio frequency: after leaving  
the area of the interference, the system auto‐  
matically becomes active again.  
Have the system immediately checked  
by a dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is  
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop as needed.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control  
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls  
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle  
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify  
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a  
dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
your driving style to the driving circumstances.  
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐  
tioned.  
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 265.  
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐  
er's service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Steering system  
Steering system may not be working.  
DSC, refer to page 172.  
Have the system checked by a dealer's  
service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is  
deactivated or DTC Dynamic  
Traction Control is activated  
Emissions  
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.  
▷ The warning light lights up:  
134  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the  
vehicle checked as soon as possible.  
High-beam Assistant  
High-beam Assistant is switched on.  
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐  
cumstances:  
High beams are switched on and off au‐  
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐  
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring  
in the engine.  
uation.  
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 149.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐  
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious  
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐  
ously damage emission control components,  
in particular the catalytic converter.  
Automatic Hold  
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle  
is automatically held in place when it is  
stationary.  
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to  
page 291.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 117.  
Green lights  
Blue lights  
High beams  
Turn signal  
Turn signal switched on.  
High beams are switched on.  
High beams, refer to page 120.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has  
failed.  
Turn signal, refer to page 119.  
Fuel gauge  
Parking lights  
Concept  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Parking lights/low beams, refer to  
page 147.  
General information  
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to  
vary.  
Low beams  
Information on refueling, refer to page 250.  
Low beams are switched on.  
Parking lights/low beams, refer to  
page 147.  
Display  
An arrow beside the fuel pump  
symbol shows which side of the  
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.  
Lane departure warning  
The indicator light lights up: the system  
is activated. A lane marking was detected  
on at least one side of the vehicle and  
warnings can be issued.  
The current range is displayed as  
numerical value.  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 164.  
135  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields  
indicate an increase in the speed.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields  
indicate the upcoming shift moment.  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait  
any further to shift.  
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire  
display flashes red and the supply of fuel is inter‐  
rupted in order to protect the engine.  
Tachometer  
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning  
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to  
protect the engine.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Shift point indicator  
The letters OFF in the tachome‐  
ter indicate that drive-ready state  
is switched off and standby state  
is switched on.  
Concept  
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which  
the best possible acceleration can be achieved.  
The letters READY in the tach‐  
ometer indicate that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready to  
start the engine automatically.  
Functional requirement  
Shift lights are shown when the SPORT or  
SPORT PLUS driving program is activated.  
Switching on/off  
1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving  
mode.  
For further information, see Idle state, standby  
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 41.  
Press Driving Dynamics Control.  
Engine temperature  
2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the trans‐  
mission.  
Display  
Display  
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at  
the low temperature end.  
Drive at moderate engine and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷ Normal operating tempera‐  
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐  
dle or in the lower half of the  
temperature display.  
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of  
the temperature range. In addition, a Check  
Control message is displayed.  
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the  
tachometer.  
136  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
To check the coolant level, refer to page 287.  
The Check Control message appears continu‐  
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Safety information  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
NOTICE  
With a driving range of less than  
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have  
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐  
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Refuel promptly.  
External temperature  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
Display  
The current range is displayed as  
numerical value next to the fuel  
gauge.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Service requirements  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is  
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to  
the weather conditions at low temperatures.  
Concept  
The function displays the service requirements  
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.  
General information  
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐  
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐  
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐  
nance.  
Range  
Concept  
The range indicates the distance that can still be  
covered with the current fuel level.  
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐  
ice requirements from your remote control.  
General information  
The estimated range available with the remaining  
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Display  
Detailed information on service  
requirements  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic  
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐  
gine function is not always ensured.  
More information on the type of service required  
may be displayed on the Control Display.  
137  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
You can check when your dealer’s service center  
was notified.  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Vehicle status"  
1. "CAR"  
3.  
"Service schedule"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3. Move the Controller to the left.  
Required maintenance procedures and le‐  
gally mandated inspections are displayed.  
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.  
4.  
"TeleService Call"  
Symbols  
Gear shift indicator  
Sym‐  
bols  
Description  
Concept  
No service is currently required.  
The system recommends the most efficient gear  
for the current driving situation.  
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐  
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐  
tion is approaching.  
General information  
Depending on the design and country version,  
the gear shift indicator may be active in the  
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission.  
The service deadline has already  
passed.  
Steptronic transmission:  
displaying  
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
Entering appointment dates  
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐  
spections.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐  
gaged gear is displayed.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
Example  
Description  
Via iDrive:  
Efficient gear is set.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Service schedule"  
Shift into efficient gear.  
4. "BMW Service"  
5. "Date:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic Service Request  
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐  
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐  
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your  
vehicle is due for service.  
138  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Camera  
Speed Limit Info  
Speed Limit Info  
Concept  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed  
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,  
the Head-up Display.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐  
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well  
as variable overhead sign posts.  
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.  
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror  
clean and clear.  
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐  
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐  
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.  
Displaying Speed Limit Info  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed  
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐  
ment cluster or via iDrive.  
The system takes into account any information  
that is stored in the navigation system and also  
displays speed limits present on routes without  
signs.  
Safety information  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
Warning  
1. "CAR"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
6. "Info on speed limits"  
7. "Show current limit"  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
Current speed limit.  
139  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the equipment,  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections.  
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior  
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a  
sticker, etc.  
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐  
porarily switched off due to excessively high  
temperatures.  
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,  
the indicator light will flash.  
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the  
camera.  
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the  
navigation system are incorrect.  
Adjusting  
Via iDrive:  
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day  
and the day of the week.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐  
tem.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Driving"  
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such  
as due to changes in road routing.  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.  
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐  
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info  
display in the instrument cluster and,  
where applicable, the Head-up Display  
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐  
ceeded. The warning that is issued when  
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on  
the Speed Limit Assist settings.  
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.  
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road  
are detected.  
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and  
road configurations.  
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately  
after vehicle delivery.  
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit  
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is  
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐  
eter in the instrument cluster.  
Selection lists  
System limits  
The system may not be fully functional and may  
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐  
uations:  
Concept  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for  
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the  
Head-up Display.  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ Entertainment source.  
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by  
objects, stickers or paint.  
▷ Current audio source.  
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.  
140  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the Control Display.  
Trip data  
Concept  
Display  
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐  
sumption or trip miles, are displayed.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the Control  
Display and in the instrument cluster.  
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐  
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.  
Depending on the equipment version, the list in  
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐  
tration.  
Display on the Control Display  
Overview  
The following information is displayed:  
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.  
▷ Average consumption, fuel.  
▷ Average speed.  
Displaying and using the list  
Button  
Function  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the  
Auto Start/Stop function.  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed  
list.  
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.  
Show list of most recent tele‐  
phone calls.  
Displays  
Via iDrive:  
Turn the thumbwheel to select  
the desired setting.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
Press the thumbwheel to con‐  
firm the setting.  
The currently selected list can  
be displayed again in the instru‐  
ment cluster by turning the  
thumbwheel.  
Consumption history  
The average consumption is shown in the con‐  
sumption history in form of a chart based on the  
distance travelled and the driving mode.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information about the route can be displayed as  
widget in the tachometer. Selecting and setting  
widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 131.  
141  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The following information is displayed:  
▷ Total mileage.  
With the button on the turn signal lever:  
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐  
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is  
selected.  
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.  
▷ Distance travelled depending on the config‐  
ured interval.  
▷ Average speed.  
Resetting trip data  
The intervals in which the values must be reset  
can be configured.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal  
lever.  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
Via iDrive:  
4. "Data since"  
1. "CAR"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐  
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐  
hicle has come to a standstill.  
4. "Data since"  
5. "Reset individual"  
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐  
cally reset after refueling with a larger  
quantity of fuel.  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automatically  
set: "Individual ( )".  
▷ "Factory ( )": the values since the time of  
the factory delivery are displayed.  
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last  
manual reset are displayed. The values  
can be reset at any time.  
Sport displays  
Resetting average values  
manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time: "Individual ( )".  
Concept  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Display on the Control Display  
Overview  
The following information is displayed:  
▷ Boost pressure.  
▷ Engine oil temperature.  
▷ Acceleration power.  
142  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷ Torque.  
▷ Power.  
Symbols  
Description  
"Engine oil level": electronic oil  
measurement, refer to  
page 284.  
Displays  
Via iDrive:  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes‐  
sages, refer to page 133.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Sport displays"  
"Service schedule": displaying  
service requirements, refer to  
page 137.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of  
two widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 131.  
"TeleService Call": Service Re‐  
quest.  
The following widgets can be selected:  
▷ Widget for torque and power.  
▷ Widget for acceleration power.  
Head-up Display  
Concept  
This system projects important information into  
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.  
Vehicle status  
The driver can get information without averting  
his or her eyes from the road.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per‐  
formed for several systems.  
General information  
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up  
Display, refer to page 306.  
Opening the vehicle status  
Via iDrive:  
Overview  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Information at a glance  
Symbols  
Description  
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the  
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to  
page 272.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐  
fer to page 265.  
143  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
Switching on/off  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Brightness"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐  
ness is set.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Display  
When the low beams are switched on, the  
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐  
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.  
Overview  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up Display:  
Adjusting the height  
▷ Vehicle speed.  
Via iDrive:  
▷ Navigation instructions.  
▷ Check Control messages.  
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.  
▷ Driver assistance systems.  
▷ Sport displays.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Height"  
Some of this information is only displayed briefly  
as needed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is  
reached.  
Selecting displays in the Head-up  
Display  
Via iDrive:  
7. Press the Controller.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
1. "CAR"  
The height of the Head-up Display can also be  
stored using the memory function, refer to  
page 107.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the rotation  
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.  
Via iDrive:  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the  
ambient brightness.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Rotation"  
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.  
144  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is  
selected.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings  
checked by a dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Special windshield  
Additional settings  
The windshield is part of the system.  
Via iDrive:  
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to  
display a precise image.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
A film in the windshield prevents double images  
from being generated.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have  
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s  
service center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop, if necessary.  
▷ "Speed Limit Assistant": access the set‐  
tings for the speed assistant.  
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the  
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.  
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and  
Shift Lights in the Head-up Display.  
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐  
played in the Head-up Display.  
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays  
are only displayed in SPORT driving  
mode.  
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐  
tinuously displayed in the Head-up  
Display.  
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐  
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐  
formation can be displayed in the lower  
section of the Head-up Display.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐  
play is influenced by the following factors:  
▷ Seat position.  
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.  
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
▷ Wet roads.  
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.  
145  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Lights  
Symbol  
Function  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Low beams.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Instrument lighting.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Lights and lighting  
Automatic headlight  
control  
Switches in the vehicle  
Concept  
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐  
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for  
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐  
cipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be switched on.  
The light switch element is located next to the  
steering wheel.  
If the low beams are switched on manually, the  
automatic headlight control is deactivated.  
Symbol  
Function  
Activating  
Lights off.  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment.  
Daytime running lights.  
Parking lights.  
The LED in the button lights up.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter is illuminated when the low beams are  
switched on.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive light functions.  
146  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as  
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐  
ing conditions.  
Low beams  
Switching on  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch  
the lights on manually.  
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state  
is switched on.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter lights up.  
Parking lights, low beams  
and roadside parking lights  
Press the button again to switch on the low  
beams when the standby state is switched on.  
General information  
Switching off  
Depending on the country variant, the low beams  
can be switched off in the low speed range.  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is  
automatically switched off.  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment.  
Parking lights  
General information  
The parking lights can only be switched on in the  
low speed range.  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside  
parking light can be switched on.  
Switching on  
Button Function  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment.  
Right roadside parking light on/off.  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter lights up.  
Left roadside parking light on/off.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐  
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and  
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-  
ready state.  
Welcome lights  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐  
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Switching off  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment or switch on the drive-ready state.  
Activating/deactivating  
Via iDrive:  
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the  
automatic headlight control will be activated.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
147  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "MGU-416756"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
light functions are switched on for a lim‐  
ited time.  
Adaptive light functions  
Concept  
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐  
tion of the roadway.  
Headlight courtesy delay  
feature  
General information  
The adaptive light functions may consist of one  
system or multiple systems, depending on the  
equipment version:  
General information  
The low beams stay lit for a certain time if the  
high beams are switched on after standby state  
is switched on.  
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 148.  
Activating  
Setting the duration  
Press the button on the light switch ele‐  
ment.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
The LED in the button lights up.  
2. "Settings"  
The adaptive light functions are active when the  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Pathway lighting"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Cornering light  
Daytime running lights  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering  
light is switched on that lights up the inside of  
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a  
certain speed.  
General information  
The daytime running lights light up when drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
The cornering light is automatically switched on  
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐  
cable, the use of turn signals.  
Activating/deactivating  
In some countries, daytime running lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐  
vate the daytime running lights.  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may  
be automatically switched on regardless of the  
steering angle.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Daytime driving lights"  
148  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐  
ances out acceleration and braking processes as  
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to  
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of  
the road is optimized.  
High-beam Assistant  
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐  
ter is illuminated when the low beams are  
switched on.  
Concept  
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic  
participants early on and automatically switches  
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic  
situation.  
The headlights are automatically switched be‐  
tween low beams and high beams.  
The blue indicator light in the instrument  
cluster lights up when the system  
switches on the high beams.  
General information  
Driving interruption with activated high-beam As‐  
sistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐  
vated when driving continues.  
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high  
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐  
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high  
beams are not switched on by the system.  
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when  
manually switching the high beams on and off,  
refer to page 120.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐  
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.  
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the  
button on the turn signal lever.  
The high beams can be switched on and off  
manually at any time.  
Deactivating  
Activating  
1.  
Press the button on the light switch  
element.  
The LED in the button lights up.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
149  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
wagons; when driving close to train or ship  
traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Sensitivity of the high-beam  
Assistant  
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming  
traffic on highways.  
General information  
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can  
be adjusted.  
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
Safety information  
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior  
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with  
stickers, etc.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐  
ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be  
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.  
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐  
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐  
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Instrument lighting  
Functional requirement  
The parking lights or low beams must be  
switched on to adjust the brightness.  
Switch off the high beams manually if required.  
Adjusting  
Adjusting the sensitivity  
Adjust the brightness with the  
thumbwheel.  
Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐  
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more  
sensitively.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Interior lights  
Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐  
onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant  
is reset to the factory settings.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐  
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐  
trolled.  
System limits  
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high beams. In situation that require  
this, therefore switch off manually.  
The system is not fully functional in the following  
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐  
sary:  
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such  
as fog or heavy precipitation.  
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as  
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and  
150  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it  
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐  
locked.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Ambient lighting"  
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐  
file currently used.  
Selecting the color scheme  
Interior lights  
Via iDrive:  
Reading lights  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Color"  
Switching the interior lights  
on/off  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Press the button.  
Setting the brightness  
Via iDrive:  
To switch off permanently: press the button and  
hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
1. "CAR"  
Switching the reading lights  
on/off  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Brightness"  
Press the button.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Dimmed while driving  
Via iDrive:  
Ambient light  
General information  
1. "CAR"  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐  
rior.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Dimmed for night driving"  
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
Switching on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐  
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐  
cle is locked.  
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐  
file currently used.  
151  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Vehicle features and  
options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
Airbags  
1
2
Front airbag, driver  
3
4
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
Front airbags help protect the driver and the  
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts  
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐  
equate protection.  
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐  
tects the side of the body in the chest, lap, and  
head area.  
152  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag  
cover panels, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Knee airbag  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of  
a frontal impact.  
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the front passenger side as a storage area.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐  
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or  
other objects to the front passenger seat that  
are not specifically suited for seats with  
integrated side airbags.  
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐  
ets, over the backrests.  
Information on optimum effect of the  
airbags  
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐  
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This  
also applies to steering wheel covers, the  
dashboard, and the seats.  
Warning  
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag  
system cannot provide protection as intended  
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐  
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to  
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐  
timum protective effect of the airbag system.  
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐  
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to  
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐  
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐  
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW  
Customer Relations for further information.  
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as  
possible when the airbag is triggered.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are also  
found on the sun visors.  
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting  
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in  
the floor area and does not support them on  
the dashboard.  
Functional readiness of the  
airbag system  
Safety information  
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
Warning  
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐  
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐  
son.  
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐  
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐  
jury. Do not touch individual components.  
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐  
senger side must stay clear - do not attach  
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐  
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS  
devices or mobile phones.  
153  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Calibrating the front seats  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the  
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the  
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐  
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐  
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system  
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by  
a dealer’s service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning  
There is a risk of jamming when moving the  
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐  
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐  
ment.  
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐  
trol Display.  
1. Press the switch and move the respective  
seat all the way forward, until it stops.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When drive-ready state is switched on,  
the warning light in the instrument clus‐  
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates  
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐  
tem and the belt tensioners.  
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still  
moves forward slightly.  
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.  
The calibration procedure is completed when the  
message on the Control Display disappears.  
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat  
the calibration.  
Malfunction  
▷ Warning light does not come on  
when drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
If the message does not disappear after a repeat  
calibration, have the system checked as soon as  
possible.  
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.  
Have the system checked.  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front-seat passenger  
airbags  
Strength of the driver's and  
front-seat passenger airbag  
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-  
seat passenger airbags very much depends on  
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Concept  
The system reads if the front passenger seat is  
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐  
ance.  
To maintain the accuracy of this function over  
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as  
a respective message appears on the Control  
Display.  
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐  
senger's side are activated or deactivated.  
General information  
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐  
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐  
structions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
154  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Indicator light for the front-seat  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
Warning  
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag  
function, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐  
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐  
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are either  
activated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the  
airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
▷ The indicator light lights up  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint sys‐  
tem or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
front passenger side are not  
activated.  
Malfunction of the automatic  
deactivation system  
When transporting older children and adults, the  
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated  
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐  
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags  
lights up.  
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for  
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐  
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐  
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐  
vated.  
In this case, change the sitting position so that  
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated  
and the indicator light goes out.  
If it is not possible to establish the desired condi‐  
tion, do not transport the person in the front pas‐  
senger seat.  
Detected child restraint systems  
The system generally detects children seated in  
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐  
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point  
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐  
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure  
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐  
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child  
restraint system has been detected and the  
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.  
To enable correct recognition of the occupied  
seat cushion.  
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or  
other items to the front passenger seat un‐  
less they are specifically determined to be  
safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐  
tem is to be installed on it.  
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that  
could press against the seat from below.  
Intelligent Safety  
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.  
Concept  
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the  
driver assistance systems.  
155  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Overview  
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐  
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems  
that can help prevent an imminent collision.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 157.  
▷ Person warning with City braking function, re‐  
fer to page 161.  
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 164.  
▷ Blind spot collision warning, refer to  
page 167.  
Safety information  
Intelligent Safety  
Warning  
Switching on/off  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐  
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems activate according to the  
last setting.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Press the button:  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
Warning  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored for the  
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting  
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu  
are activated.  
156  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐  
ing settings are switched between:  
Safety information  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning  
time.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Press and hold this button:  
Warning  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Front collision mitigation  
Concept  
The system may prevent some accidents. In the  
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐  
pact speed.  
Warning  
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐  
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐  
ently, if needed.  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐  
tem is controlled by the following sensors:  
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.  
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
The system issues a two-phase warning of a  
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds  
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐  
ings may vary with the current driving situation.  
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐  
tentionally, the approach control warning and  
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐  
tem reactions.  
157  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Intelligent Safety  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored for the  
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting  
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu  
are activated.  
Camera  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.  
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror  
clean and clear.  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
With radar sensor  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of  
the front bumper.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐  
structed.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Switching on/off  
Switching on automatically  
Setting the warning time  
The system is automatically active after every  
driving off.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching on/off manually  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and warnings"  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
158  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
5. "Front collision mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Early"  
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐  
tivation of the braking system is omitted.  
If an acute warning is provided, the system may  
also provide assistance, such as through braking,  
when there is risk of collision.  
▷ "Medium"  
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prior warning.  
The selected time is stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
Braking intervention  
Warning with braking function  
Display  
A warning symbol appears in the instrument  
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐  
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐  
nent.  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a  
warning is active, the maximum braking force is  
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal  
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐  
fully.  
The system may also assist in braking if there is  
a risk of collision.  
Symbol Measure  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the  
vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.  
Brake and increase distance.  
City brake function: the braking intervention oc‐  
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
With radar sensor: the braking intervention oc‐  
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic  
signal sounds: acute warning.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking  
pressure. No automatic delay occurs.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐  
ver, if necessary.  
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle  
stability has not been restricted, for instance by  
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.  
Prewarning  
This warning is provided, for instance when there  
is impending danger of a collision or the distance  
to the vehicle ahead is too small.  
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention  
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or  
by actively moving the steering wheel.  
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking  
as warranted.  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the  
limitations of the system and actively intervene  
as warranted.  
Acute warning with braking function  
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐  
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐  
proaches another object at a high differential  
speed.  
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐  
pending on the driving situation, the acute warn‐  
ing may be accompanied by a brief activation of  
the braking system.  
159  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐  
low this speed, the system is reactivated.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐  
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐  
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐  
terior mirror.  
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐  
porarily switched off due to excessively high  
temperatures.  
Detection range  
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar  
sensors are dirty or covered.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately  
after vehicle delivery.  
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because  
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun  
low in the sky.  
The system's detection potential is limited.  
Only objects that are detected by the system are  
taken into account.  
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in  
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐  
pact the function of the radar sensors and may  
even cause them to fail.  
Thus, a system reaction might not come or  
might come late.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
instance:  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for  
example the warning time, the more warnings are  
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐  
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐  
actions.  
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach  
them at high speed.  
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,  
or sharply decelerating vehicles.  
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.  
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
160  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
pedestrians who are located within the extended  
area only if they are moving in the direction of the  
central area.  
Person warning with City  
braking function  
Concept  
The system may prevent some accidents involv‐  
ing pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an  
accident, the system may reduce impact speed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
The system sounds a warning in the city speed  
range before an imminent collision and activates  
brakes independently, if needed.  
General information  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of  
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds  
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning  
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists  
who are within the detection range of the sys‐  
tem.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐  
tem is controlled by the following sensors:  
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.  
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.  
Detection range  
Warning  
Due to system limits, individual functions can  
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the  
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a  
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety  
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.  
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐  
ided into two areas:  
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left  
of the central area.  
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located  
within the central area. A warning is issued about  
161  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐  
structed.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Switching on/off  
Switching on automatically  
The system is automatically active after every  
driving off.  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
Intelligent Safety  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
Camera  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored for the  
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting  
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu  
are activated.  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.  
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror  
clean and clear.  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
With radar sensor  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of  
the front bumper.  
162  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the  
limitations of the system and actively intervene  
as warranted.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
System limits  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning with braking function  
Display  
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐  
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐  
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
The red symbol is displayed and a signal  
sounds.  
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle  
equipment, a red warning triangle lights  
up in the instrument cluster.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Intervene immediately by braking or make an  
evasive maneuver.  
Detection range  
The system's detection potential is limited.  
Braking intervention  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a  
warning is active, the maximum braking force is  
used when the brake is applied. This requires the  
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly  
and forcefully.  
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐  
sued late.  
The following situations may not be detected, for  
instance:  
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.  
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also  
assist with braking.  
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐  
cause of the viewing angle or contour.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the  
vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.  
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle  
stability has not been restricted, for instance by  
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.  
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than  
32 in/80 cm.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional or may  
not be available in the following situations:  
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention  
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or  
by actively moving the steering wheel.  
163  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ In tight curves.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.  
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a  
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes  
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐  
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the  
vehicle in the lane.  
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐  
activated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐  
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐  
terior mirror.  
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐  
porarily switched off due to excessively high  
temperatures.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar  
sensors are dirty or covered.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road  
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐  
sponse to a warning.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately  
after vehicle delivery.  
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because  
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun  
low in the sky.  
▷ When it is dark outside.  
Warning  
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in  
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐  
pact the function of the radar sensors and may  
even cause them to fail.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Lane departure warning  
Concept  
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐  
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.  
Functional requirements  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the lane departure warning to be active.  
General information  
This camera-based system warns starting at a  
minimum speed.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Warnings are issued by means of a steering  
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering  
wheel vibration can be adjusted.  
164  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored for the  
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting  
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu  
are activated.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
Intelligent Safety  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
Camera  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror  
clean and clear.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Switching on/off  
Switching on automatically  
Setting the warning time  
Via iDrive:  
The lane departure warning activates automati‐  
cally after departure if the function was switched  
on at the end of the last trip.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching on/off manually  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
165  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ "Early"  
▷ "Medium"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The symbol illuminates green: at lane  
marking was detected on at least one  
side of the vehicle and warnings can be  
issued.  
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐  
pressed depending on the situation,  
for instance during passing without a turn  
signal or when purposely driving over lane  
markings in curves.  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has  
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐  
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐  
ting.  
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.  
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐  
file currently used.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Via iDrive:  
If the turn signal is switched on before a lane  
change, a warning is not issued.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Steering intervention  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a  
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes  
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐  
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps  
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐  
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel  
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐  
ing an active steering intervention, the display in  
the instrument cluster will blink.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems and stored for the driver profile currently  
used.  
Switching steering intervention  
on/off  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for blind spot collision warning  
and lane departure warning.  
Warning signal  
In the event of multiple active steering interven‐  
tions by the system within 3 minutes without the  
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning sig‐  
nal will sound at the second steering interven‐  
tion. Beginning with the third steering interven‐  
tion, an continuous warning will sound.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
The warning signal and Check-Control message  
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to  
the lane.  
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐  
file currently used.  
166  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐  
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐  
terior mirror.  
End of warning  
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐  
tions:  
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐  
porarily switched off due to excessively high  
temperatures.  
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.  
▷ When returning to your own lane.  
▷ When braking hard.  
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine  
via the Start/Stop button.  
▷ When using the turn signal.  
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.  
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately  
after vehicle delivery.  
System limits  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is not fully functional.  
Safety information  
Blind spot collision warning  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Concept  
Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in  
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐  
hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in  
various gradations in these situations.  
General information  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings  
such as in construction areas.  
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,  
dirt or water.  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind and next to the vehicle when  
traveling faster than a minimum speed.  
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.  
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for  
the intelligent Safety systems.  
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.  
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front  
of you.  
The system indicates whether there are vehicles  
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.  
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because  
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun  
low in the sky.  
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.  
167  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐  
tions described above.  
Radar sensors  
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
The radar sensors are located in the rear  
bumper.  
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar  
sensors clean and unobstructed.  
Switching on/off  
Warning  
Switching on automatically  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐  
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due  
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings  
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a  
manner that is not consistent with their normal  
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐  
vated after departure if the function was  
switched on at the end of the last trip.  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tem is displayed.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,  
all systems are now switched on.  
Overview  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the  
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐  
ual settings are activated and stored for the  
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting  
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu  
are activated.  
Button in the vehicle  
Press the button repeatedly.  
The following settings are switched be‐  
tween:  
Intelligent Safety  
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the  
subfunctions.  
168  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on according to the individual settings.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐  
vidually switched off.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐  
tems and stored for the driver profile currently  
used.  
Press and hold this button.  
All Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off.  
Warning function  
Button Status  
Button lights up green: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched on.  
Light in the exterior mirror  
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐  
gent Safety systems are switched off  
or currently unavailable.  
Button does not light up: all Intelligent  
Safety systems are switched off.  
Setting the warning time  
Via iDrive:  
Prewarning  
1. "CAR"  
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates  
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐  
proaching from behind.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and warnings"  
5. "Blind spot collision warning"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
▷ "Early"  
Acute warning  
If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is  
in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates  
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes  
brightly.  
▷ "Medium"  
▷ "Late"  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or after deactivation of the  
turn signal.  
▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐  
put.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Flashing of the light  
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking  
serves as system self-test.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
169  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Displaying warnings  
System limits  
Depending on the selected warning settings, for  
instance warning time, more warnings can be  
displayed. However, there may also be an excess  
of premature warnings of critical situations.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
PostCrash – iBrake  
Concept  
In the event of an accident, the system can bring  
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐  
vention by the driver in certain situations. This  
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the  
consequences thereof.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐  
matically.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐  
sponds according to the setting.  
Harder vehicle braking  
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring  
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake  
Assistant allows.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.  
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be  
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved  
by the automatic braking function. Automatic  
braking is interrupted.  
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.  
Interrupting automatic braking  
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐  
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐  
sive maneuver.  
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
▷ If cargo protrudes.  
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in  
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐  
pact the function of the radar sensors and may  
even cause them to fail.  
Interrupt automatic braking:  
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.  
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.  
A Check Control message is displayed when the  
system is not fully functional.  
170  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The break recommendation can also be  
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Fatigue alert  
Via iDrive:  
General information  
1. "CAR"  
The system can detect decreasing alertness or  
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous  
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it  
is recommended that the driver takes a break.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
Safety information  
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is  
made with a defined value.  
Warning  
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is  
issued earlier.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's  
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or  
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected  
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure  
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions.  
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a  
message is displayed in the Control Display with  
the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se‐  
lected.  
Function  
The system is switched on each time drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
After a break, another recommendation to take a  
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐  
mately 45 minutes.  
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐  
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐  
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.  
System limits  
This procedure takes the following criteria into  
account:  
The function may be limited in the following sit‐  
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no  
warning at all:  
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.  
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of  
trip.  
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below  
about 43 mph/70 km/h.  
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system  
is active and can also display a recommendation  
to take a break.  
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
▷ In active driving situations, such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
Break recommendation  
Adjusting  
▷ When the road surface is poor.  
▷ In the event of strong side winds.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a  
break during longer trips on highways.  
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each  
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus  
display a break recommendation.  
171  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Adaptive brake assistant  
In combination with Active Cruise Control, this  
system ensures that the brakes respond even  
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Drive-off assistant  
Concept  
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.  
Anti-lock Braking System  
ABS  
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without  
delay.  
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐  
ing.  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
The vehicle maintains its steering power even  
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐  
tive safety.  
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐  
gine.  
DSC Dynamic Stability  
Control  
Brake assistant  
Concept  
Within the physical limits, the system helps to  
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing  
engine speed and by braking the individual  
wheels.  
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system  
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐  
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐  
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐  
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System  
ABS.  
General information  
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐  
ditions, for instance:  
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal  
for the duration of the emergency stop.  
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.  
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
172  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Deactivating/activating DSC  
General information  
Warning  
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐  
duced during acceleration and when driving in  
curves.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again  
as soon as possible.  
Deactivating DSC  
Hold the button down until DSC OFF is  
displayed in the instrument cluster and  
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.  
Warning  
When driving with a roof load, for instance with  
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐  
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk  
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐  
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of  
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC  
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with  
roof load.  
Activating DSC  
Press the button.  
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator  
light go out.  
Display  
In the instrument cluster  
Overview  
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
Button in the vehicle  
Indicator/warning lights  
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐  
activated.  
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls  
the drive and braking forces.  
The indicator light lights up: DSC has  
malfunctioned.  
DSC OFF  
173  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating DTC  
DTC Dynamic Traction  
Control  
Activating DTC  
Press the button.  
Concept  
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability  
Control where forward momentum is optimized.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐  
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF  
lights up.  
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐  
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐  
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐  
what limited driving stability.  
Deactivating DTC  
Press the button again.  
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator  
light go out.  
General information  
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐  
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during  
acceleration and when driving in curves.  
Display  
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in  
the following situations:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-  
covered roads.  
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose  
ground.  
Indicator/warning lights  
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐  
vated.  
▷ When driving with snow chains.  
Overview  
Automatic program change  
Button in the vehicle  
In certain situations, the DSC is activated auto‐  
matically:  
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐  
tion ACC is activated.  
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent  
Safety systems.  
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.  
M sport differential  
DSC OFF  
The active M differential provides for continu‐  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differential  
depending on the driving situation. This prevents  
spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐  
vides optimal traction in any driving situation.  
174  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐  
ing style to the situation.  
Variable sport steering  
The variable sport steering facilitates a direct and  
agile driving style with little steering effort. The  
variable sports steering works independently of  
the current speed, varying the steering ratio in  
line with the steering angle.  
175  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Overview  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Button Function  
System on/off, refer to page 176.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assist, refer to  
page 187: take over suggested  
speed manually.  
Rocker switch:  
Changing the speed limit, refer to  
page 177.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Concept  
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for  
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding  
speed limits.  
Operation  
Switching on  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
General information  
The system can limit the speed, starting at a  
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be  
driven at any speed below the set speed limit.  
The current speed is accepted as the speed  
limit.  
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is  
stationary or driving at low speeds,  
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the re‐  
spective speed.  
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐  
namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving  
mode may be switched on as well.  
Switching off  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations, for example:  
▷ When the engine is switched off.  
176  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ When cruise control is switched on.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
There is no warning in this case.  
▷ When certain programs are activated via the  
Driving Dynamics Control.  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to  
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
The displays go out.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.  
Interrupting  
If the reverse gear is engaged or idle, the system  
is interrupted.  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Changing the speed limit  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐  
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes  
while the vehicle speed is greater than  
the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,  
a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the ve‐  
hicle speed while driving, the signal sounds  
after some time.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the  
resistance point, the speed limit increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷ If the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way  
down, there is no signal.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally  
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐  
hicle is not actively braked.  
Display in the speedometer  
If the speed limit is set during a trip to a value be‐  
low the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it  
drops to the set speed limit.  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive.  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted.  
The current speed can also be stored by press‐  
ing a button:  
▷ No marking: system is  
switched off.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
Exceeding the speed limit  
Indicator light  
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit,  
a warning is issued.  
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐  
tem is switched on.  
177  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit  
has been exceeded.  
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐  
age to property. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐  
terrupted.  
Warning  
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐  
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic  
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐  
tervene where appropriate.  
Cruise control  
Concept  
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the desired speed. The  
system accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain condi‐  
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐  
pending on the driving mode.  
Cruise control on/off, refer to  
page 178.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting, refer to page 180.  
Safety information  
Pause cruise control, refer to  
page 179.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assist, refer to  
page 187: take over suggested  
speed manually.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to page 179.  
Switching cruise control on/off  
Warning  
Switching on  
The use of the system can lead to an increased  
risk of accidents in the following situations,  
for instance:  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light  
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the  
current speed.  
▷ On winding roads.  
▷ In heavy traffic.  
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
178  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the desired  
speed.  
Switching off  
The stored speed is displayed, refer to  
page 180, on the speedometer.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is  
deleted.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐  
ton.  
Pausing cruise control  
Press the button.  
Interrupting manually  
Changing the speed  
When active, press the button.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.  
▷ Steptronic transmission: when selector lever  
position D is disengaged.  
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the  
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road  
is clear.  
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving  
Dynamics Control.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the  
resistance point, the desired speed increases  
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Setting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
The maximum speed that can be set de‐  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐  
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on  
the accelerator pedal.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
179  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Continuing cruise control  
System limits  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed.  
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.  
The speed may not be maintained on uphill  
grades if the engine power is insufficient.  
Make sure that the difference between current  
speed and stored speed is not too large before  
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐  
tional braking or accelerating may occur.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐  
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in  
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill  
grades.  
Press the button with the system inter‐  
rupted.  
Active Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function ACC  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value is  
deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Concept  
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐  
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using  
the buttons on the steering wheel.  
▷ When the system is switched off.  
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
The system maintains the desired speed on  
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐  
ates or brakes automatically.  
Display in the speedometer  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The  
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐  
lows.  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive, the marking indicates the  
desired speed.  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted, the marking indicates  
the stored speed.  
General information  
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and  
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles  
driving ahead of you.  
▷ No marking: system is switched off.  
Indicator light  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain condi‐  
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐  
pending on the driving mode.  
▷ Indicator light green: system is active.  
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective  
speed.  
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.  
Displays in the Head-up Display  
Some system information can also be displayed  
in the Head-up Display.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and  
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,  
the system is able to detect this within the given  
system limits.  
The symbol is displayed when the set  
desired speed is reached.  
180  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving  
vehicle.  
Safety information  
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.  
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.  
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Warning  
Cruise control on/off, refer to  
page 182.  
or  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.  
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐  
ing.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Store current speed.  
▷ Set the parking brake.  
Speed Limit Assist, refer to  
page 187: take over suggested  
speed manually.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of the  
curb.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting, refer to page 184.  
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a  
wheel chock.  
Pause cruise control, refer to  
page 182.  
Increase the distance, refer to  
page 184.  
Warning  
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐  
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic  
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐  
tervene where appropriate.  
Switch distance control on/off.  
Reduce distance, refer to page 183.  
Switch distance control on/off.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to page 183.  
Warning  
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐  
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐  
ing situations:  
181  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Radar sensor  
Switching on/off and interrupting  
cruise control  
Switching on  
Depending on the equipment, press the  
relevant button on the steering wheel.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light  
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the  
current speed.  
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.  
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐  
structed.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
Camera  
Switching off  
To switch off the system while standing, step on  
brake pedal at the same time.  
Press the following button on the steering wheel  
again:  
Depending on the equipment, press the  
relevant button.  
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.  
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror  
clean and clear.  
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is  
deleted.  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the following button on the  
steering wheel:  
Area of application  
The system is best used on well-constructed  
roads.  
Button on the steering wheel.  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
If interrupting the system while stationary, press  
on the brake pedal at the same time.  
The maximum speed that can be set is  
100 mph/160 km/h.  
The system can also be activated when station‐  
ary.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.  
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.  
182  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or  
Changing the speed  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.  
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's  
door is opened while the vehicle is standing  
still.  
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an  
extended period, for instance on a road with  
very little traffic without curb or shoulder  
markings.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,  
for instance by dirt or heavy fog.  
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐  
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐  
tem.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the  
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road  
is clear.  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the  
resistance point, the desired speed increases  
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Setting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past  
the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
Adjusting the distance  
Safety information  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐  
tivated.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system  
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk  
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be  
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust  
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐  
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐  
tance, possibly by braking.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐  
eter.  
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if  
necessary.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐  
ton.  
Reduce distance  
Press the button.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
183  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,  
refer to page 184.  
Switch mode of the cruise control  
Switching cruise control without distance control  
off and on:  
Increase the distance  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,  
refer to page 184.  
Switching on distance control:  
▷
Press the button.  
Continuing cruise control  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed.  
▷
Press the button.  
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐  
played.  
Make sure that the difference between current  
speed and stored speed is not too large before  
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐  
tional braking or accelerating may occur.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
Press the following button on the steering wheel  
with the system interrupted:  
Display in the speedometer  
Button on the steering wheel.  
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐  
tive, the marking indicates the  
desired speed.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐  
ues.  
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐  
rupted, the marking indicates  
the stored speed.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value is  
deleted and cannot be called up again:  
▷ When the system is switched off.  
▷ No marking: system is switched off.  
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Distance to vehicle ahead of you  
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is  
shown.  
Changing between cruise control  
with/without distance control  
Symbol  
Description  
Safety information  
Distance 1  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driving  
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored  
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Adjust the desired  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Distance 2  
184  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Indicator/warning lights  
Symbol  
Description  
Distance 3  
Symbol  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
No indicator light: system is  
switched off.  
Distance 4  
This value is set automatically  
after the system is switched on.  
Vehicle symbol flashes:  
The conditions are not adequate  
for the system to work.  
The system was deactivated but  
applies the brakes until you ac‐  
tively resume control by press‐  
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐  
erator pedal.  
System interrupted.  
The vehicle symbol and dis‐  
tance bars flash red and an  
acoustic signal sounds:  
No distance control display, as  
the accelerator pedal is being  
pressed.  
Brake and make an evasive ma‐  
neuver, if necessary.  
Detected vehicle  
Displays in the Head-up Display  
Desired speed  
Symbol  
Description  
Some system information can also be displayed  
in the Head-up Display.  
Green symbol:  
A vehicle has been detected  
ahead of you.  
The symbol is displayed when the set  
desired speed is reached.  
Distance information  
The system maintains the set distance to the ve‐  
hicle in front.  
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is  
too short.  
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the  
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move  
away.  
The distance information is active in the follow‐  
ing situations:  
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by  
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or  
pressing the rocker switch.  
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.  
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer  
to page 143.  
▷ Distance too short.  
185  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
swerves into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐  
quests that the driver intervene by braking and  
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.  
Detection range  
Cornering  
The detection capacity of the system and the  
automatic braking capacity are limited.  
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be  
detected.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the following  
situations:  
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the  
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐  
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive  
into a curve at an appropriate speed.  
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road  
users.  
▷ For red traffic lights.  
▷ For cross traffic.  
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐  
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle  
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐  
tected very late.  
▷ For oncoming traffic.  
Swerving vehicles  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the  
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you  
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After  
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected  
until it is completely within the same lane as your  
vehicle.  
186  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐  
activated and controls speed independently.  
Malfunction  
Radar sensor  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐  
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused  
by damage incurred, for instance during parking.  
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐  
tem fails.  
▷ On steep uphill grades.  
▷ In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Have the system checked by a dealer's service  
center or another qualified service center or re‐  
pair shop.  
Weather  
The system may be impaired when the detection  
range of the radar sensor is partially covered  
such as by the license plate holder.  
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐  
orable weather or light conditions:  
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.  
Camera  
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are  
already recognized.  
The function for detecting and responding when  
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in  
the following situations:  
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐  
tions:  
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately  
after vehicle delivery.  
▷ Wet conditions.  
▷ Snowfall.  
▷ Slush.  
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A  
Check Control message is displayed.  
▷ Fog.  
▷ Glare.  
Speed Limit Assist  
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic  
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐  
stance by braking, steering or evading.  
Concept  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit  
along the route, this new speed value can be ap‐  
plied for the following systems:  
Engine power  
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.  
The speed may not be maintained on uphill  
grades if the engine power is insufficient.  
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐  
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in  
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill  
grades.  
▷ Cruise control.  
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐  
vated.  
187  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit  
Safety information  
can be applied manually.  
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐  
its are displayed in the instrument cluster  
without being applied.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched  
off.  
Displays in the instrument  
cluster  
A message is indicated in the instrument cluster  
when the system and cruise control are acti‐  
vated.  
Warning  
Symbol  
Function  
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐  
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic  
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐  
tervene where appropriate.  
Indicator light illuminates green, to‐  
gether with the symbol for a cruise  
control system:  
Speed Limit Assist is active and  
detected speed limits can be ap‐  
plied manually for the displayed  
system.  
Overview  
Detected change of a speed limit  
with immediate effect.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
the detected speed limit can be  
applied with the SET button.  
Apply suggested speed manually.  
As soon as the speed limit has  
been applied, a green checkmark  
is displayed.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Switching on/off and adjusting  
Via iDrive:  
Apply detected speed limit  
manually  
A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise  
control manually.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Driving"  
As soon as the SET icon lights up,  
press the button.  
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
6. "Info on speed limits"  
Select the desired setting:  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit  
Info system.  
188  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info,  
refer to page 140.  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for  
the Active Cruise Control.  
Warning  
The system may not respond to top speed limi‐  
tations when the navigation system is unable to  
clearly identify the position of the vehicle.  
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
PDC Park Distance Control  
Concept  
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you  
are approaching slowly in front of or behind the  
vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐  
play on the Control Display.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles  
at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the  
side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by  
the side protection, refer to page 192, function.  
General information  
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐  
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly  
on the sides of the vehicle.  
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐  
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.  
Park assistance button  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
Ultrasound sensors  
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,  
for instance in the bumpers.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐  
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
Safety information  
Functional requirements  
Warning  
Ensure full functionality:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐  
ers, bicycle racks.  
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.  
189  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐  
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park  
assistance button.  
Switching on/off  
Switching on automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
Warning  
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when  
the engine is running.  
Signal tones  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while  
approaching detected obstacles if the speed  
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The  
activation distance depends on the situation  
in question.  
General information  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐  
ject is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a  
signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.  
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐  
stacles are detected on and off.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals.  
Via iDrive:  
If the distance to a detected object is less than  
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐  
hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller  
than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant  
tone will sound.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. Where applicable: "Automatic PDC  
activation"  
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone  
and constant tone are switched off if the selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
Depending on equipment, an additional camera  
view is also switched on.  
Volume  
Automatic deactivation during  
forward travel  
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.  
Via iDrive:  
The system switches off when a certain driving  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Volume PDC signal"  
6. Set the desired value.  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
▷ On: the LED lights up.  
▷ Off: the LED goes out.  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
190  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐  
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when  
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.  
Visual warning  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐  
vented under all circumstances.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
braking intervention.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐  
ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐  
ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator  
pedal and release it again.  
The approach of the vehicle to an object is  
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are  
farther away are already displayed on the Control  
Display before a signal sounds.  
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the  
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐  
sible at any time.  
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.  
The range of the sensors is represented in the  
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are  
detected.  
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC  
and parking assistant.  
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation  
of the required space.  
Safety information  
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐  
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a  
different view with obstacle markings as needed:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐  
tively intervene where appropriate.  
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.  
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 202: de‐  
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the  
PDC display against vehicles approaching in the  
front or rear from the side.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
Via iDrive:  
Depending on the equipment  
version: emergency brake  
function, Active PDC  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
Concept  
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates  
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of  
collision.  
5. If necessary, "Active PDC with braking  
interv."  
6. "Active PDC with braking interv."  
General information  
This function may not be available. Contact your  
authorized dealer’s service center or another  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
191  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
markings are shown in black after a certain time.  
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐  
tured.  
Depending on the equipment  
version: side protection  
Concept  
The system warns of obstacles on the side of  
the vehicle.  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
This function may not be available. Contact your  
authorized dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐  
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when  
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC  
and parking assistant.  
Display  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in  
the following situations:  
▷ For small children and animals.  
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance  
coats.  
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,  
for instance from passing vehicles or loud  
machines.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐  
cle.  
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged  
or out of position.  
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐  
stacles.  
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,  
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.  
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles  
were detected.  
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other  
vehicles.  
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the  
vehicle was not yet captured.  
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
▷ With moving objects.  
Limits of side protection  
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The system does not detect whether an obstacle  
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the  
192  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
such as fences.  
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.  
White symbol is displayed, and the range  
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control  
Display.  
▷ With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a  
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐  
ice center or repair shop.  
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷ With plants and bushes.  
Rearview camera  
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can move into the blind area of the  
sensors before or after a continuous tone  
sounds.  
Concept  
The rearview camera provides assistance in  
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area  
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
system.  
False warnings  
Safety information  
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐  
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐  
cle within the detection range:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐  
tively intervene where appropriate.  
▷ In heavy rain.  
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with  
ice.  
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.  
▷ On rough road surfaces.  
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.  
▷ In large buildings with right angles and  
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐  
rages.  
Overview  
Depending on the vehicle  
equipment: button in the vehicle  
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.  
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.  
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance  
sweeping machines, high pressure steam  
cleaners or neon lights.  
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic  
PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to  
page 190, for instance in automatic vehicle  
washes.  
193  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Park assistance button  
Switching the view via iDrive  
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,  
change the view via iDrive:  
Camera  
1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.  
2.  
"Rear view camera"  
The rearview camera image is displayed.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.  
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.  
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera  
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems that  
are not connected to a trailer power socket  
can restrict the visibility range of the camera.  
The camera lens is located in the handle of the  
trunk lid.  
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If  
necessary, clean the camera lens.  
Assistance functions  
General information  
Switching on/off  
More than one assistance function can be active  
at the same time.  
Switching on automatically  
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐  
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine  
is running.  
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐  
vated.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2. With corresponding equipment:  
"Camera image"  
Automatic deactivation during  
forward travel  
The system switches off when a certain driving  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
3.  
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are  
displayed, refer to page 195.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
▷
"Obstacle mark.".  
Depending on the vehicle  
equipment: switching on/off  
manually  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance  
Control are displayed, refer to page 195,  
by markings.  
Press the park assistance button.  
▷ On: the LED lights up.  
▷ Off: the LED goes out.  
The parking assistance functions are shown on  
the Control Display.  
194  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre‐  
sponding turning radius line.  
Parking aid lines  
Pathway lines  
Obstacle marking  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐  
quired when parking and maneuvering on level  
roads.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles  
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park  
Distance Control sensors.  
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and  
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel  
movements.  
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image  
of the rearview camera.  
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings  
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance  
Control.  
Turning radius lines  
Setting brightness and contrast  
via iDrive  
With the rearview camera switched on:  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2.  
3.  
"Camera image"  
"Brightness"  
"Contrast"  
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
▷
▷
4. Set the desired value.  
Turning radius lines show the course of the  
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.  
System limits  
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the  
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.  
Deactivated camera  
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the  
trunk lid is open, the camera image is displayed  
hatched in gray.  
Parking using pathway and turning radius  
lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐  
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐  
ing space.  
195  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Detection of objects  
General information  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
The functions for parking diagonally to the road,  
driving out of parallel parking spaces, and driving  
out in reverse may not be available. Contact your  
authorized dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐  
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when  
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐  
sistance functions also consider data from the  
PDC Park Distance Control.  
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐  
trol chapter.  
Handling  
Parking assistant handling is divided into three  
steps:  
The objects displayed on the Control Display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate  
the distance from the objects on the display.  
▷ Switching on and activating.  
▷ Parking space search.  
▷ Parking.  
Parking Assistant  
System status and instructions on required ac‐  
tions are displayed on the Control Display.  
Concept  
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on  
both sides of the vehicle.  
Steptronic transmission  
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐  
ble parking line and takes control of the following  
functions during the parking procedure:  
▷ Steering.  
▷ Accelerating and braking.  
▷ Changing the gears.  
Parking is automatic.  
The system supports the driver in the following  
situations:  
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel  
parking.  
Safety information  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when  
reverse parking diagonally to the road, diago‐  
nal parking. The system orients itself with the  
middle of the parking space during diagonal  
parking.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the  
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the  
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐  
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐  
ate.  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when  
driving out of parallel parking spaces, refer to  
page 200.  
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when  
exiting tight parking or street situations in re‐  
verse, see Back-up assistant, refer to  
page 200.  
196  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
NOTICE  
Ultrasound sensors  
Ensure full functionality:  
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over  
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐  
tervene where appropriate.  
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐  
ers.  
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.  
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance  
Control, refer to page 189, applies in addition.  
For measuring parking spaces  
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:  
5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
General information:  
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length  
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.  
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum  
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.  
Parallel parking to the road:  
Park assistance button  
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your  
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Ultrasound sensors  
Depending on the equipment version: diagonal  
parking:  
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.  
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must  
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical  
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐  
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.  
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,  
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the  
parking spaces are measured and the distances  
to obstacles determined.  
For parking  
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.  
Steptronic transmission:  
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.  
197  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Parking space search and system  
status  
Switching on and activating  
Switching on with the button  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED lights up.  
The current status of the parking space search is  
indicated on the Control Display.  
Parking assistant is activated automatically.  
Switching on with reverse gear  
Shift into reverse.  
▷
Parking assistant is activated and parking  
space search is active.  
The current status of the parking space search is  
indicated on the Control Display.  
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking  
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐  
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,  
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and  
an acoustic signal sounds. Switch signal tone  
on/off, refer to page 199.  
To activate:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Switching on via iDrive  
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view  
must be active.  
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly  
detected, the system automatically adjusts  
the suitable parking method. In the case of  
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐  
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In  
this case, the desired parking method must  
be selected manually.  
1. Move the Controller to the right.  
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control  
Display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Display on the Control Display  
System activated/deactivated  
▷
The parking procedure is active. Steering  
control has been taken over by system.  
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐  
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and  
straight, even if the system is deactivated.  
When the system is deactivated, the displays  
on the Control Display are shown in gray.  
Sym‐  
bol  
Meaning  
Gray: the system is not available.  
White: the system is available but not  
activated.  
Parking using the parking  
assistant  
The system is activated.  
Parking space search is active.  
Parking  
The parking procedure is active.  
Steering control has been taken over  
by system.  
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐  
tant.  
Engage the reverse gear and activate the  
system or press the parking assistance but‐  
ton, refer to page 198, on the Control Display.  
198  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Parking assistant is activated.  
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays  
clearances that are too small.  
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of  
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐  
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.  
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or  
the time taken for parking is exceeded.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on the  
Control Display, refer to page 198.  
▷ When switching to another function on the  
Control Display.  
Steptronic transmission:  
▷ If the trunk lid is open.  
▷ If doors are open.  
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the  
parking process: select the parking space on  
the Control Display.  
▷ When setting the parking brake.  
▷ During acceleration.  
The system takes over the steering.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐  
play.  
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an  
extended period while the vehicle is station‐  
ary.  
Steptronic transmission:  
At the end of the parking procedure, the P  
selector lever position is set.  
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The end of the parking procedure is indicated  
on the Control Display.  
Resuming  
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐  
ued, if needed.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to  
page 198, and follow the instructions on the  
Control Display.  
Interrupting manually  
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any  
time:  
▷
Press the park assistance button.  
Switching off  
The system can be switched off manually:  
▷
"Autom. Parking" Select the symbol on  
the Control Display.  
Press the park assistance button.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is interrupted automatically in the  
following situations:  
Switching signal tone for  
suitable parking spaces on/off  
Via iDrive:  
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or  
takes over steering.  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road  
surfaces.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Automatic Parking"  
6. "Alert if parking space detected"  
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome, such as curbs.  
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐  
pear.  
199  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐  
rently used.  
Driving out of parking spaces  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Steptronic transmission:  
Depending on the equipment  
version: driving out of a parking  
space using the parking  
assistant  
Press the park assistance button or shift into  
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to  
switch on the parking assistant.  
3. Move the Controller to the right.  
4. Activate the parking assistant on the Control  
Concept  
Display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
The system makes driving out of parallel parking  
spaces easier.  
5. On the Control Display, confirm the required  
direction for driving out of the parking space if  
necessary.  
General information  
6. Steptronic transmission:  
This function may not be available. Contact your  
authorized dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐  
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when  
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.  
The system takes control of the maneuver. A  
message will be displayed at the end of the  
maneuver.  
7. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of the parking space and drive off  
as usual.  
Steptronic transmission  
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line  
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐  
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐  
ver:  
The parking assistant is switched off auto‐  
matically.  
Depending on the equipment  
version: back-up assistant  
▷ Steering.  
▷ Accelerating and braking.  
▷ Changing the gears.  
Concept  
The system supports the driver when driving in  
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight  
parking or street situations.  
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the  
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can  
drive out of the parking space without further  
steering movements.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the  
last route before the vehicle is switched off. This  
stored route can be driven back with automated  
steering.  
Functional requirement  
▷ The vehicle has been parked using the park‐  
ing assistant.  
General information  
▷ An obstacle has been detected in front of the  
vehicle.  
This function may not be available. Contact your  
authorized dealer’s service center or another  
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐  
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when  
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.  
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐  
ger than your vehicle.  
The system takes control of the steering when  
driving in reverse along the stored route.  
200  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐  
erator pedal and brake.  
Terminating the system  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
Functional requirement  
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the  
route.  
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or  
takes over steering.  
▷ When engaging a forward gear.  
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.  
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐  
tionary.  
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving  
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.  
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐  
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐  
ing angle.  
▷ The return route must be at least  
12 in./30 cm wider than your vehicle.  
Driving back with automated  
steering  
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into  
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary  
and the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Limits of the back-up assistant  
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you  
suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐  
diately and take over control of the vehicle.  
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is  
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.  
2. Move the Controller to the right.  
3. "Back-up Assistant"  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning  
is issued and the function may be canceled.  
The system takes over the steering.  
The possible route is shown on the Control  
Display.  
System limits  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal  
and the brake.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the  
vehicle's surroundings, and if you suddenly  
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Pay attention  
to the information from the PDC.  
The system is designed to operate in certain  
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐  
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐  
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk  
of damage to property. Actively intervene as  
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐  
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Display  
where required.  
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is  
reached and take control of the vehicle, such  
as by shifting to a forward gear.  
At the end of the stored route, a signal will  
sound and a request will be displayed, also  
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐  
hicle.  
No parking assistance  
The parking assistant does not offer assistance  
in the following situations:  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.  
201  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷ With small and low objects, for instance  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
boxes.  
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷ On slippery ground.  
▷ With plants and bushes.  
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can move into the blind area of the  
sensors before or after a continuous tone  
sounds.  
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.  
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
system.  
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐  
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐  
tected at all.  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in  
the following situations:  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷ For small children and animals.  
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance  
coats.  
The parking assistant failed. Have the system  
checked by a dealer's service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,  
for instance from passing vehicles or loud  
machines.  
Cross traffic warning  
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged  
or out of position.  
Concept  
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,  
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.  
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐  
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is  
detected sooner by the system than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other  
vehicles.  
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
▷ With moving objects.  
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure  
such as fences.  
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.  
202  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Radar sensors  
General information  
The radar sensors are located in the rear  
bumper.  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
The system indicates approaching traffic.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar  
sensors clean and unobstructed.  
Switching on/off  
Activating/deactivating the system  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the  
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility  
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.  
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch  
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐  
propriate.  
1.  
2. Move the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the park assistance button.  
4. "Cross traffic warning"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
Or via iDrive:  
Overview  
1. "CAR"  
Button in the vehicle  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
6. "Cross traffic warning"  
Switching on automatically  
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐  
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as  
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is  
active and a gear is engaged.  
Park assistance button  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
203  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Switching off automatically  
The system is automatically switched off in the  
following situations:  
Display in the PDC Park Distance  
Control view  
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.  
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐  
ing assistant.  
Warning  
General information  
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐  
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles  
are detected by the sensors.  
The respective display is called up on the Con‐  
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the  
light in the exterior mirror may flash.  
Acoustic warning  
Light in the exterior mirror  
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐  
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐  
spective direction.  
System limits  
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐  
lowing situations:  
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very  
high.  
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles  
are detected by the rear sensors and your own  
vehicle is moving backwards.  
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
▷ In tight curves.  
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
▷ If cargo protrudes.  
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed.  
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the  
sensors, that hide cross traffic.  
204  
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Performance Control  
Performance Control enhances the agility of the  
vehicle.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked  
individually when a sporty driving style is used.  
The resulting braking power is simultaneously  
largely compensated by an engine intervention.  
Adaptive M chassis  
Concept  
The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport  
chassis/suspension. This system reduces unde‐  
sirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic  
driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐  
ces.  
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving  
comfort depending on the road surface condition  
and driving style.  
General information  
The system offers several different damping set‐  
tings.  
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐  
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐  
trol, refer to page 127.  
Driving mode  
SPORT  
Damper tuning  
Firm  
SPORT PLUS  
COMFORT/ECO PRO  
Sporty and firm  
Balanced out  
205  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Automatic climate control  
Overview  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Interior air quality  
Climate control functions  
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the  
following components:  
Button  
Function  
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.  
▷ Microfilter.  
Temperature, refer to page 207.  
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐  
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.  
Climate control operation, refer  
to page 207.  
Depending on the equipment specification:  
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.  
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.  
▷ Parked-car ventilation.  
Maximum cooling, refer to  
page 208.  
AUTO program, refer to  
page 208.  
Recirculated-air mode, refer to  
page 208.  
Switching off, refer to page 207.  
Air distribution, manual, refer to  
page 209.  
Defrost and defog the wind‐  
shield, refer to page 209.  
Rear window defroster, refer to  
page 209.  
206  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
6. "Temperature:"  
Button  
Function  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
Seat heating, refer to page 108.  
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐  
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate  
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the  
set temperature.  
Air flow, manual, refer to  
page 209.  
Switching on/off  
Air conditioning  
Concept  
Switching on  
Press any button except for the following:  
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐  
humidified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
▷ Switching off.  
▷ Rear window defroster.  
▷ Lower air flow button side.  
▷ Seat heating.  
The car's interior can only be cooled with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Switching on/off  
Switching off  
Complete system:  
Press the button.  
Press the button until the control panel  
switches off.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Temperature  
Concept  
The automatic climate control achieves the set  
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by  
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,  
and then keeps it constant.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "A/C"  
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine  
running.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Adjusting  
Press the upper or lower button side to  
set the desired temperature.  
The cooling function is switched on automati‐  
cally with the AUTO program.  
When using the automatic climate control, con‐  
densation water develops and collects under‐  
neath the vehicle.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
207  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Automatic"  
Maximum cooling  
Concept  
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐  
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Depending on the selected temperature and out‐  
side influences, the air is directed to the wind‐  
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the  
floor area.  
The air conditioning, refer to page 211, is  
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐  
gram.  
General information  
The function is available with external tempera‐  
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Point the side vents toward the side windows.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
Switching on/off  
Press the button.  
Recirculated-air mode  
Concept  
The LED is illuminated with the system  
switched on.  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants  
in the immediate environment by temporarily  
suspending the supply of outside air. The system  
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.  
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐  
gion. The vents need to be open for this.  
The air flow can be adjusted with the program  
active.  
Operation  
AUTO program  
Concept  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
Press the button:  
The LED is illuminated when recircu‐  
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐  
side air is shut off.  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh  
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
The air flow, air distribution and temperature will  
be controlled automatically depending on the in‐  
terior temperature and the setting for the desired  
temperature.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching on/off  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
Press the button.  
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO  
program switched on.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Fresh air"  
Via iDrive:  
▷ "Air recirculation"  
▷ "Auto-recirculate"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air  
mode switches off automatically after a certain  
208  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
amount of time, depending on the environmental  
conditions.  
▷ Windows and floor area.  
▷ Windows.  
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐  
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
▷ Windows and upper body.  
▷ Upper body region.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐  
mate control display.  
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐  
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to  
page 214.  
If there is window condensation, defog the win‐  
dows, refer to page 214.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Concept  
Defrosting windshield and  
remove condensation  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
Concept  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from  
the windshield and the front side windows.  
General information  
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO  
program first.  
Switching on/off  
Press the button.  
Operation  
The LED is illuminated with the system  
switched on.  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase air flow.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
If there is any window condensation,  
press the button on the driver's side or  
switch on the air conditioning. Make sure that air  
can flow to the windshield.  
The air flow may be reduced automatically to  
save battery power.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
manually  
Rear window defroster  
Press the button. The LED lights up.  
Concept  
The function is available with the engine  
running.  
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐  
justed manually.  
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐  
ically after a certain period of time.  
Operation  
Press the button repeatedly to select a  
program:  
Microfilter  
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the  
incoming air.  
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.  
▷ Upper body region and floor area.  
▷ Floor area.  
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐  
nance, refer to page 290.  
209  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Button  
Function  
Automatic climate control  
with enhanced features  
Seat heating, refer to page 108.  
Climate control operation, refer  
to page 211.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Opening the Climate menu, re‐  
fer to page 210.  
For the following settings, for in‐  
stance: upper body temperature  
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐  
tion, air conditioning.  
Opening the Climate menu  
Press the button.  
The Climate menu is displayed.  
Climate control functions  
For example, the following climate control func‐  
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu:  
Button  
Function  
▷ Heating/ventilation.  
▷ Air quality.  
Temperature, refer to page 211.  
▷ Seats/surfaces.  
Recirculated-air mode, refer to  
page 213.  
▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating  
▷ Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling, refer to  
page 212.  
Individual settings can be entered for some of  
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐  
tensity.  
AUTO program, refer to  
page 212.  
Air flow, manual, refer to  
page 213.  
Switching on/off  
Switching off, refer to page 210.  
Switching on  
Press any button except for the following:  
Air distribution, manual, refer to  
page 214.  
▷ Menu.  
▷ Rear window defroster.  
▷ Lower air flow button side.  
▷ Seat heating.  
Defrost and defog the wind‐  
shield, refer to page 214.  
Rear window defroster, refer to  
page 214.  
Switching off  
Press and hold the lower button until  
the control switches off.  
210  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting  
Via iDrive:  
Temperature  
Concept  
The automatic climate control achieves the set  
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by  
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,  
and then keeps it constant.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Adjusting  
6. "Temp. adjustment upper body"  
7. Set the desired temperature:  
▷ Toward blue: colder.  
Press the upper or lower button side to  
set the desired temperature.  
Via iDrive:  
▷ Toward red: warmer.  
1. "CAR"  
Air conditioning  
Concept  
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐  
humidified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Temperature:"  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
8. "OK"  
The car's interior can only be cooled with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐  
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate  
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the  
set temperature.  
Switching on/off  
Press the button.  
Via iDrive:  
Temperature of the ventilation  
General information  
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper  
body region can be adjusted.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "A/C"  
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.  
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.  
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine  
running.  
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body  
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on  
the adjusted temperature.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
This does not change the set interior tempera‐  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
The cooling function is switched on automati‐  
cally with the AUTO program.  
211  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
When using the automatic climate control, con‐  
densation water develops and collects under‐  
neath the vehicle.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Maximum cooling  
Concept  
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐  
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
6. "Automatic"  
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐  
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐  
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side  
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.  
General information  
The function is available with external tempera‐  
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
The air conditioning, refer to page 211, is  
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐  
gram.  
Point the side vents toward the side windows.  
Switching on/off  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐  
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐  
densation as much as possible.  
Press the button.  
The LED is illuminated with the system  
switched on.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐  
gion. The vents need to be open for this.  
Intensity  
The air flow can be adjusted with the program  
active.  
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐  
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic  
control for the air flow and air distribution.  
AUTO program  
Concept  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase intensity.  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
The air distribution and temperature are control‐  
led automatically depending on the temperature  
in the car's interior and the desired temperature  
setting including the selected intensity of the air  
flow.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Switching on/off  
6. "Level"  
7. Set the desired intensity.  
Press the button.  
The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐  
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.  
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO  
program switched on.  
The selected intensity is shown on the climate  
control display.  
212  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air  
mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is  
shut off.  
Automatic recirculated-air  
control AUC  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh  
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
Concept  
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐  
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.  
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior  
air is recirculated.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
General information  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐  
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off  
automatically.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷ "Fresh air"  
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐  
ously flows into the car's interior.  
▷ "Air recirculation"  
▷ "Auto-recirculate"  
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐  
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air  
mode switches off automatically after a certain  
amount of time, depending on the environmental  
conditions.  
Switching on/off  
Via iDrive:  
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐  
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. "Automatic"  
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐  
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to  
page 214.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Concept  
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐  
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to  
page 214.  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
Recirculated-air mode  
Concept  
General information  
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO  
program first.  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants  
in the immediate environment by temporarily  
suspending the supply of outside air. The system  
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.  
Operation  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase air flow.  
Operation  
Press the button:  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
213  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The air flow may be reduced automatically to  
save battery power.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Synchronize"  
The program is switched off automatically if the  
settings on the front passenger side or in the  
rear are changed.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
manually  
Concept  
Defrosting windshield and  
remove condensation  
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐  
justed manually.  
Concept  
Operation  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from  
the windshield and the front side windows.  
Press the button repeatedly to select a  
program:  
Switching on/off  
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.  
▷ Upper body region and floor area.  
▷ Floor area.  
Press the button.  
The LED is illuminated with the system  
switched on.  
▷ Windows and floor area.  
▷ Windows.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
▷ Windows and upper body.  
▷ Upper body region.  
If there is window condensation, press  
the button on the driver's side or switch  
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation  
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐  
shield.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐  
mate control display.  
If there is window condensation, defog the win‐  
dows, refer to page 214.  
Rear window defroster  
SYNC program  
Concept  
The following settings of the driver's side can be  
transferred to the front-passenger side:  
Press the button. The LED lights up.  
The function is available with the engine  
running.  
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐  
ically after a certain period of time.  
▷ Temperature.  
▷ Air flow.  
▷ Air distribution.  
▷ AUTO program.  
Microfilter/activated-charcoal  
filter  
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the  
incoming air.  
Switching on/off  
Via iDrive:  
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐  
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters  
the vehicle.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
214  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance, refer to page 290.  
Parked-car ventilation  
Concept  
Ventilation  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before  
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐  
bly heated using the residual engine heat.  
Concept  
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐  
justed.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
Adjusting the ventilation  
General information  
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct  
or indirect ventilation.  
The activation time is determined based on the  
external temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure time.  
Open the vents and position them in a way that  
ensures effective climate control.  
Functional requirements  
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
Direct ventilation  
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending  
on the adjusted temperature.  
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.  
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the  
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit  
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐  
hicle battery. The system will be available  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
Indirect ventilation  
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐  
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐  
rectly, depending on the set temperature.  
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Front ventilation  
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.  
Opening the Climate menu  
Press the button.  
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.  
Individual settings can be entered for some of  
the climate control functions.  
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐  
row 1.  
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing  
of the vents, arrow 2.  
215  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
Departure time  
Concept  
There are different ways to switch the system on  
or off.  
Different departure times can be set to ensure a  
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at  
the time of departure.  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
The system is switched on once.  
Using the button  
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-  
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the  
automatic climate control buttons.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will be  
switched on promptly before the set depar‐  
ture time.  
Press any button except:  
▷ Rear window defroster.  
▷ Lower air flow button side.  
▷ Seat heating.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷ Set departure times.  
▷ Activate departure times.  
▷ Menu.  
Setting the departure time  
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐  
ing the vehicle.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
Via iDrive  
2. "Settings"  
1. "CAR"  
3. "Climate control"  
2. "Settings"  
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"  
5. "Departure schedule"  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
Display  
Symbol  
Description  
Activating the departure time  
Symbol on the climate con‐  
trol display.  
Functional requirement  
If a departure time is to influence the switching  
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐  
parture time must be activated first.  
Flashing: the parked-car  
ventilation is switched on.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
216  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
3. "Climate control"  
Warning  
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"  
5. "Preconditioning for departure"  
6. "Departure schedule"  
When stationary climate control is in operation,  
high temperatures can occur underneath the  
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas  
system. If combustible materials, such as  
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts  
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can  
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no  
combustible materials can come in contact with  
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐  
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,  
oil or other combustible objects.  
7. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
,
Symbol on the climate control display  
signals an activated departure time.  
Stationary climate control  
through Remote Engine  
Start  
Functional requirements  
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
Concept  
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.  
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's  
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐  
perature. The system automatically cools, vents,  
and heats depending on the interior, external,  
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐  
moved more easily.  
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system  
will be available again as soon as the drive-  
ready state is activated and deactivated  
again.  
The system starts the engine automatically and  
allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
▷ Hood is closed.  
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Safety information  
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐  
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute  
the area in and around the vehicle or enter into  
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐  
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐  
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐  
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate  
Enabling the automatic engine  
start function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐  
fore using the system.  
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐  
matically to climatize the car's interior.  
outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.  
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐  
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐  
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐  
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
217  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start"  
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"  
7. Confirm the disclaimer.  
Via remote control  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the remote control.  
Press the button on the remote control  
three times within 1 second.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
After operating the remote control, it will take ap‐  
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is  
switched on.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as the  
system is switched on.  
To switch off the system, press the button again  
three times.  
Opening the Climate menu  
Climatization for the requested  
departure time  
Press the button.  
General information  
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the  
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐  
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.  
Individual settings can be entered for some of  
the climate control functions.  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
The system is switched on once.  
There are different ways to switch the system on  
or off:  
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
▷ Via iDrive.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will be  
switched on 10 minutes before the set de‐  
parture time.  
▷ Via remote control.  
The system switches off automatically after ap‐  
prox. 15 minutes.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷ Set departure times.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system will  
be available again as soon as the drive-ready  
state is activated and deactivated again.  
▷ Activate departure times.  
The climate control function will start approxi‐  
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time  
and continue for 5 more minutes after the depar‐  
ture time.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system will  
be available again as soon as the drive-ready  
state is activated and deactivated again.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
Observe the information about the intended use  
of the vehicle, refer to page 10.  
218  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Setting the departure time  
Using climate control  
functions via voice  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
2. "Settings"  
▷ Instructions for the voice activation system,  
refer to page 52.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the departure time.  
7. Select day of the week, if needed.  
▷ With voice operation, you can change be‐  
tween voice operation, iDrive and buttons.  
▷ To have the available voice commands read  
out loud: ›Voice commands‹ or ›Help‹.  
Activating the departure time  
Using the voice activation  
system  
Most climate control functions can be used via  
voice in the car's interior, e.g.:  
Functional requirement  
If a requested departure time is to influence the  
switching on of the system, the respective de‐  
parture time must be activated first.  
▷ Activation of the air conditioner: ›Activate  
climate control‹.  
▷ Deactivation of the automatic recirculated-air  
function: ›Deactivate ... air recirculation‹.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
▷ Configuration of a specific tempera‐  
ture: ›Temperature [...] at ...‹.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
,
The symbol on the automatic climate  
control signals an activated departure time  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Symbol  
Description  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the stationary cli‐  
mate control. The vehicle is not  
ready to drive.  
219  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control,  
such as the garage door, may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a  
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also follow  
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐  
mitter.  
Integrated Universal  
Remote Control  
Compatibility  
If this symbol is printed on the packaging  
or in the owner's manual of the system to  
be controlled, the system is generally  
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote  
Control.  
Concept  
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the  
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of  
remote-controlled systems such as garage door  
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.  
Additional questions are answered by:  
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
▷ on the Internet.  
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐  
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To  
operate the remote control, the buttons on the  
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐  
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the  
particular system is required in order to program  
the remote control.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐  
tions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐  
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door  
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐  
sible operation.  
220  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐  
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and  
release the hand-held transmitter button for  
2 seconds.  
Control elements on the interior  
mirror  
6.  
▷ The LED lights up green: programming  
completed.  
Release the button.  
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not  
complete.  
Press the button on the interior mirror for  
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐  
cedure three times to complete the pro‐  
gramming procedure.  
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.  
▷ LED, arrow 2.  
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐  
quired for programming.  
If the integrated universal remote control  
remains nonoperational, continue with the  
special features for change code wireless  
systems.  
Programming  
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐  
onds: programming not completed.  
General information  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be  
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐  
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal  
remote control.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐  
peat steps 3 to 5.  
1. Switch on standby state.  
2. Initial setup:  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐  
led system after repeated programming, please  
check if the system to be controlled features a  
rolling code radio system.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the  
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes  
green rapidly. This erases all programming of  
the buttons on the interior mirror.  
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.  
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐  
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will  
slowly begin flashing orange.  
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the  
integrated Universal Remote Control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system  
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm  
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.  
The required distance depends on the hand-  
held transmitter.  
Please read the owner's manual to find out how  
to synchronize the system.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second  
person.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
221  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Synchronizing the universal remote control with  
the system:  
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held  
transmitter was detected but program‐  
ming is not complete.  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Press the button on the interior mirror for  
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐  
cedure three times to complete the pro‐  
gramming procedure.  
2. Program the relevant button on the interior  
mirror as described.  
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the  
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds  
for the next step.  
If the integrated universal remote control  
remains nonoperational, continue with the  
special features for change code wireless  
systems.  
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐  
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and  
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step  
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐  
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the  
programmed function will be carried out.  
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐  
onds: programming not completed.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
If the programming procedure is not completed,  
the previous programming will remain un‐  
changed.  
Reprogramming individual  
buttons  
Operation  
1. Switch on standby state.  
Warning  
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be  
programmed.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control,  
such as the garage door, may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a  
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also follow  
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐  
mitter.  
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror  
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐  
lease the button.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system  
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm  
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.  
The required distance depends on the hand-  
held transmitter.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐  
erated using the button on the interior mirror  
while the drive-ready or standby state is  
switched on. To do this, hold down the button  
within receiving range of the system until the  
function is activated. The interior mirror LED  
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐  
mitted.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐  
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and  
release the hand-held transmitter button for  
2 seconds.  
6. The LED can light up in different ways.  
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐  
ming procedure is completed.  
Deleting stored functions  
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐  
tions cannot be deleted individually.  
Release the button.  
222  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐  
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately  
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror  
flashes green rapidly.  
Ashtray  
Center console  
Opening  
1. Slide the cover forward.  
Sun visor  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the  
side.  
2. Fold the ashtray cover upward.  
Folding up  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐  
sor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind  
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror  
lighting switches on.  
Emptying  
Grab the ashtray with the cover closed on the  
side handle, arrow 1, and take it out, arrow 2.  
223  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Cigarette lighter  
Safety information  
Warning  
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot  
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.  
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette  
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐  
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.  
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.  
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐  
rette lighter and burn themselves.  
The cigarette lighter is located between the ash‐  
tray and the wireless charging tray.  
Operation  
Push in the cigarette lighter.  
The cigarette lighter can be re‐  
moved as soon as it pops back  
out.  
NOTICE  
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can  
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage  
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or  
socket cover again after using the socket.  
Sockets  
Concept  
Center console  
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for  
electrical equipment when standby and drive-  
ready state are switched on.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐  
patible connectors.  
Slide the cover forward.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the  
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,  
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be  
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐  
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
224  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area  
of unfolding.  
USB interface  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connection  
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the  
section on USB connections, refer to page 66.  
NOTICE  
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can  
work with high voltages and currents, which  
means that the 12 volt on-board network can  
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of  
damage to property. Only connect battery  
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting  
aid terminals in the engine compartment.  
In the center armrest  
NOTICE  
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can  
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage  
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or  
socket cover again after using the socket.  
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
▷ USB port Type C.  
Center console  
1. Slide the cover forward.  
▷ For charging of mobile devices.  
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.  
▷ for data transfer.  
In the center console  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large  
USB connectors, may block or damage the  
cover when it is being opened or closed. There  
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the area of movement of the cover is clear  
while opening and closing it.  
2. The socket is located between the ashtray  
and the wireless charging tray. Pull off the  
cover.  
225  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Slide the cover forward.  
The USB interface is located between the ash‐  
tray and the wireless charging tray.  
Properties:  
▷ USB port Type A.  
▷ For charging of external devices.  
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A  
▷ For data transfer.  
226  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Driver's side glove  
compartment  
Safety information  
Warning  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes  
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐  
partment can be thrown into the car's interior  
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐  
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐  
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the  
glove compartment immediately after using it.  
Storage compartments  
Opening  
General information  
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage  
compartments for stowing objects.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐  
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,  
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐  
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or  
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices  
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the  
car's interior.  
Pull the handle.  
Closing  
Fold cover closed.  
NOTICE  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐  
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.  
227  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Front passenger side glove Compartments in the doors  
compartment  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
Safety information  
Safety information  
Warning  
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes  
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐  
Warning  
partment can be thrown into the car's interior  
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐  
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐  
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the  
glove compartment immediately after using it.  
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or  
glasses, can break in the event of an accident  
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass  
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not use any breakable objects while driving.  
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage  
compartments.  
Opening  
Storage compartment in  
the center console  
Opening  
Pull the handle.  
The light in the glove compartment switches on.  
Closing  
Fold cover closed.  
Locking  
Slide the cover forward.  
The glove compartment can be locked with an  
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove  
compartment.  
Closing  
Pull the cover on the handle bar back.  
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐  
mote control can be handed over without the  
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is  
parked by valet parking.  
228  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Opening  
Center armrest  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Opening  
Press the button.  
The lighting of the center armrest switches on.  
Closing  
Press cover down until it engages.  
Press the button.  
Storage compartment  
behind the seats  
The lighting of the center armrest switches on.  
Closing  
Press cover down until it engages.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Cup holders  
Safety information  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the  
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐  
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and  
secure objects and cargo properly.  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an  
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled  
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions  
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage  
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
General information  
There is a storage compartment behind the  
seats.  
229  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the net  
Slide the upper edge of the net up to the correct  
height. Grab the top of the net as close as possi‐  
ble to the edge next to the holder. At first, a re‐  
sistance must be overcome.  
230  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and  
options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the  
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐  
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and  
secure objects and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐  
cific and optional features offered with the series.  
It also describes features and functions that are  
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due  
to the selected options or country versions. This  
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐  
tems. When using these functions and systems,  
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐  
served.  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Loading  
Steps for Determining Correct  
Load Limit  
Safety information  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
Warning  
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐  
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in  
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics  
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐  
bility, lengthening the braking distances and  
changing the steering response. There is a risk  
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load  
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐  
mitted gross weight.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐  
hicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐  
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐  
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is  
Warning  
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐  
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,  
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐  
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or  
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices  
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the  
car's interior.  
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That  
weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐  
231  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
Lashing eyes  
Load  
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for  
securing cargo.  
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of  
the occupants and the cargo.  
Multi-function hook  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
General information  
A multi-function hook is located on the left and  
right side in the cargo area.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.  
Safety information  
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low  
as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo  
partition.  
Warning  
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about during  
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to  
property. Only hang lightweight objects,  
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet  
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.  
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function  
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the  
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
General information  
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,  
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to  
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Tensioning strap  
A tensioning strap is available on the right side  
trim for fastening small objects.  
232  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Net  
Storage compartment on  
the left side  
A storage compartment is located on the left  
side in the cargo area.  
Through-loading system  
Concept  
The through-loading system allows the transport  
of long objects, such as skies.  
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  
left side. To transport larger objects, slide the net  
down. Grab the top of the net as close as possi‐  
ble to the edge next to the holder. At first, a re‐  
sistance must be overcome.  
Opening the through-loading  
1. Slide the net down. Grab the top of the net as  
close as possible to the edge next to the  
holder. At first, a resistance must be over‐  
come.  
Storage compartment on  
the right side  
General information  
A storage compartment is available on the right  
side of the cargo area.  
Opening  
2. Pull on the handle and fold the flap down.  
Unlock the cover of the right side panel, arrow 1,  
and fold open, arrow 2.  
233  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
3. In the cargo area: open flap completely. The  
flap is secured with a magnet.  
234  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
235  
 
236  
 

Related Topics

Cockpit
Operating state of the vehicle
iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
General settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Fifth Generation (2019-2026) Toyota Rav4 SUV Fifth Generation (2019-2026) Toyota Rav4 SUV
Third Generation (2006-2012) Toyota Rav4 SUV Third Generation (2006-2012) Toyota Rav4 SUV
Fifth Generation (2020-2025) Toyota Supra 2 Door Fifth Generation (2020-2025) Toyota Supra 2 Door
Twelfth Generation (2018-2026) Toyota Corolla 4 Door Twelfth Generation (2018-2026) Toyota Corolla 4 Door
Eleventh generation (2013-2017) Toyota Corolla 4 Door Eleventh generation (2013-2017) Toyota Corolla 4 Door
Ninth Generation (2007-2012) Toyota Corolla 4 Door Ninth Generation (2007-2012) Toyota Corolla 4 Door